Nikon Digital Camera 26427 User Manual

DIGITAL CAMERA  
Reference Manual  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
Read This First  
Thank you for purchasing the Nikon COOLPIX P7800 digital camera. Before  
using the camera, please read the information in “For Your Safety” (Avii-ix)  
and familiarize yourself with the information provided in this manual. After  
reading, please keep this manual handy and refer to it to enhance your  
enjoyment of your new camera.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ii  
   
About This Manual  
If you want to start using the camera right away, see “The Basics of Shooting  
and Playback” (A20).  
To learn about the parts of the camera and information that is displayed in the  
Other Information  
Symbols and Conventions  
To make it easier to find the information you need, the following symbols  
and conventions are used in this manual:  
Symbol  
Description  
This icon indicates cautions and information that should be read  
before using the camera.  
B
C
This icon indicates notes and information that should be read before  
using the camera.  
These icons indicate other pages containing relevant  
A/E/F information; E: “Reference Section”, F: “Technical Notes and  
Index.”  
SD and SDHC/SDXC memory cards are referred to as “memory cards” in this  
manual.  
The setting at the time of purchase is referred to as the “default setting.”  
The names of menu items displayed in the camera monitor, and the names  
of buttons or messages displayed on a computer monitor appear in bold.  
In this manual, images are sometimes omitted from monitor display samples  
so that monitor indicators can be more clearly shown.  
Illustrations and monitor content shown in this manual may differ from the  
actual product.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
iii  
 
Information and Precautions  
Life-Long Learning  
As part of Nikon’s “Life-Long Learning” commitment to ongoing product support  
and education, continually updated information is available online at the following  
sites:  
For users in the U.S.A.: http://www.nikonusa.com/  
For users in Europe and Africa: http://www.europe-nikon.com/support/  
For users in Asia, Oceania, and the Middle East: http://www.nikon-asia.com/  
Visit these sites to keep up-to-date with the latest product information, tips, answers  
to frequently asked questions (FAQs), and general advice on digital imaging and  
photography. Additional information may be available from the Nikon representative  
in your area. Visit the site below for contact information:  
http://imaging.nikon.com/  
Use Only Nikon Brand Electronic Accessories  
Nikon COOLPIX cameras are designed to the highest standards and include complex  
electronic circuitry. Only Nikon brand electronic accessories (including battery  
chargers, batteries and AC adapters) certified by Nikon specifically for use with this  
Nikon digital camera are engineered and proven to operate within the operational  
and safety requirements of this electronic circuitry.  
THE USE OF NON-NIKON ELECTRONIC ACCESSORIES COULD DAMAGE THE CAMERA  
AND MAY VOID YOUR NIKON WARRANTY.  
The use of third-party rechargeable Li-ion batteries not bearing the Nikon  
holographic seal could interfere with normal operation of the camera or result in the  
batteries overheating, igniting, rupturing, or leaking.  
For more information about Nikon brand accessories, contact a local authorized  
Nikon dealer.  
Holographic seal: Identifies this  
device as an authentic Nikon product.  
Before Taking Important Pictures  
Before taking pictures on important occasions (such as at weddings or before taking  
the camera on a trip), take a test shot to ensure that the camera is functioning  
normally. Nikon will not be held liable for damages or lost profits that may result from  
product malfunction.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
iv  
 
About the Manuals  
No part of the manuals included with this product may be reproduced,  
transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any  
language in any form, by any means, without Nikon’s prior written permission.  
Nikon reserves the right to change the specifications of the hardware and software  
described in these manuals at any time and without prior notice.  
Nikon will not be held liable for any damages resulting from the use of this  
product.  
While every effort was made to ensure that the information in these manuals is  
accurate and complete, we would appreciate it were you to bring any errors or  
omissions to the attention of the Nikon representative in your area (address  
provided separately).  
Notice Concerning Prohibition of Copying or Reproduction  
Note that simply being in possession of material that was digitally copied or  
reproduced by means of a scanner, digital camera or other device may be  
punishable by law.  
• Items prohibited by law from being copied or reproduced  
Do not copy or reproduce paper money, coins, securities, government bonds or local  
government bonds, even if such copies or reproductions are stamped “Sample.” The  
copying or reproduction of paper money, coins, or securities which are circulated in a  
foreign country is prohibited. Unless the prior permission of the government was  
obtained, the copying or reproduction of unused postage stamps or post cards  
issued by the government is prohibited.  
The copying or reproduction of stamps issued by the government and of certified  
documents stipulated by law is prohibited.  
• Cautions on certain copies and reproductions  
The government has issued cautions on copies or reproductions of securities issued  
by private companies (shares, bills, checks, gift certificates, etc.), commuter passes, or  
coupon tickets, except when a minimum of necessary copies are to be provided for  
business use by a company. Also, do not copy or reproduce passports issued by the  
government, licenses issued by public agencies and private groups, ID cards and  
tickets, such as passes and meal coupons.  
• Comply with copyright notices  
The copying or reproduction of copyrighted creative works such as books, music,  
paintings, woodcut prints, maps, drawings, movies, and photographs is governed by  
national and international copyright laws. Do not use this product for the purpose of  
making illegal copies or to infringe copyright laws.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
v
Disposing of Data Storage Devices  
Please note that deleting images or formatting data storage devices such as memory  
cards or built-in camera memory does not completely erase the original image data.  
Deleted files can sometimes be recovered from discarded storage devices using  
commercially available software, potentially resulting in the malicious use of personal  
image data. Ensuring the privacy of such data is the user’s responsibility.  
Before discarding a data storage device or transferring ownership to another person,  
erase all data using commercial deletion software, or format the device and then  
completely refill it with images containing no private information (for example,  
pictures of empty sky) without attaching the GPS unit (available separately). Be sure  
to also replace any pictures selected for the Select an image option in the  
Welcome screen setting (A99). Care should be taken to avoid injury or damage to  
property when physically destroying data storage devices.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
vi  
For Your Safety  
To prevent damage to your Nikon product or injury to yourself or to others,  
read the following safety precautions in their entirety before using this  
equipment. Keep these safety instructions where all those who use the product  
will read them.  
The consequences that could result from failure to observe the precautions  
listed in this section are indicated by the following symbol:  
This icon marks warnings, information that should be read before using  
this Nikon product, to prevent possible injury.  
WARNINGS  
Turn off in the event of  
malfunction  
Do not use the camera or  
battery charger in the  
presence of flammable gas  
Do not use electronic equipment in  
Should you notice smoke or an  
unusual smell coming from the  
camera or battery charger, unplug the the presence of flammable gas, as this  
battery charger and remove the  
battery immediately, taking care to  
avoid burns. Continued operation  
could result in injury. After removing  
or disconnecting the power source,  
take the equipment to a Nikon-  
authorized service representative for  
inspection.  
could result in explosion or fire.  
Handle the camera strap  
with care  
Never place the strap around the neck  
of an infant or child.  
Keep out of reach of children  
Particular care should be taken to  
prevent infants from putting the  
battery or other small parts into their  
mouths.  
Do not disassemble  
Touching the internal parts of the  
camera or battery charger could  
result in injury. Repairs should be  
performed only by qualified  
Do not remain in contact  
with the camera, battery  
technicians. Should the camera or  
battery charger break open as the  
result of a fall or other accident, take  
the product to a Nikon-authorized  
service representative for inspection,  
after unplugging the product and/or  
removing the battery.  
charger, or AC adapter for  
extended periods while the  
devices are on or in use  
Parts of the devices become hot.  
Leaving the devices in direct contact  
with the skin for extended periods  
may result in low-temperature burns.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
vii  
     
Do not leave the product  
where it will be exposed to  
extremely high  
temperatures, such as in an  
enclosed automobile or in  
direct sunlight  
damage to the product, be sure to  
remove the battery when no  
charge remains.  
Discontinue use immediately  
should you notice any change in  
the battery, such as discoloration or  
deformation.  
If liquid from the damaged battery  
comes in contact with clothing or  
skin, rinse immediately with plenty  
of water.  
Failure to observe this precaution  
could cause damage or fire.  
Observe caution when  
handling the battery  
The battery may leak, overheat, or  
explode if improperly handled.  
Observe the following precautions  
when handling the battery for use in  
this product:  
Before replacing the battery, turn  
the product off. If you are using the  
battery charger/AC adapter, be  
sure it is unplugged.  
Use only a Rechargeable Li-ion  
Battery EN-EL14 (included). Charge  
the battery by using a Battery  
Charger MH-24 (included). For  
Remote Control ML-L3 (available  
separately), use only 3 V CR2025  
lithium battery.  
When inserting the battery, do not  
attempt to insert it upside down or  
backwards.  
Do not short or disassemble the  
battery or attempt to remove or  
break the battery insulation or  
casing.  
Do not expose the battery to flame  
or to excessive heat.  
Do not immerse in or expose to  
water.  
Observe the following  
precautions when handling  
the battery charger  
Keep dry. Failure to observe this  
precaution could result in fire or  
electric shock.  
Dust on or near the metal parts of  
the plug should be removed with a  
dry cloth. Continued use could  
result in fire.  
Do not handle the plug or go near  
the battery charger during  
lightning storms. Failure to observe  
this precaution could result in  
electric shock.  
Do not damage, modify, forcibly  
tug or bend the USB cable, place it  
under heavy objects, or expose it  
to heat or flames. Should the  
insulation be damaged and the  
wires become exposed, take it to a  
Nikon-authorized service  
representative for inspection.  
Failure to observe these  
precautions could result in fire or  
electric shock.  
Do not handle the plug or battery  
charger with wet hands. Failure to  
observe this precaution could  
result in electric shock.  
Do not use with travel converters  
or adapters designed to convert  
from one voltage to another or  
Replace the terminal cover when  
transporting the battery. Do not  
transport or store with metal  
objects such as necklaces or  
hairpins.  
The battery is prone to leakage  
when fully discharged. To avoid  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
viii  
with DC-to-AC inverters. Failure to  
observe this precaution could  
damage the product or cause  
overheating or fire.  
prevent liquid crystal from the  
monitor touching the skin or entering  
the eyes or mouth.  
Turn the power off when  
using inside an airplane or  
the hospital  
Use appropriate cables  
When connecting cables to the input  
and output jacks, use only the cables  
provided or sold by Nikon for the  
purpose, to maintain compliance with  
product regulations.  
Turn the power off while inside the  
aircraft during take off or landing.  
Do not use wireless network functions  
while in the air.  
Follow the instructions of the hospital  
when using while in a hospital.  
The electromagnetic waves emitted  
by this camera may disrupt the  
electronic systems of the aircraft or  
the instruments of the hospital.  
If you are using wireless network  
devices, remove them from the  
camera before boarding an aircraft or  
entering a hospital.  
Handle moving parts with  
care  
Be careful that your fingers or other  
objects are not pinched by the lens  
cover or other moving parts.  
CD-ROMs  
The CD-ROMs included with this  
device should not be played back on  
audio CD equipment. Playing CD-  
ROMs on an audio CD player could  
cause hearing loss or damage the  
equipment.  
Using the flash close to your  
subject's eyes could cause  
temporary visual  
impairment.  
The flash should be no less than 1 m  
(3 ft 4 in.) from the subject.  
Particular care should be observed  
when photographing infants.  
Do not operate the flash with  
the flash window touching a  
person or object  
Failure to observe this precaution  
could result in burns or fire.  
Avoid contact with liquid  
crystal  
Should the monitor break, care  
should be taken to avoid injury  
caused by broken glass and to  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ix  
   
Notices  
not occur in a particular installation. If  
this equipment does cause harmful  
interference to radio or television  
reception, which can be determined  
by turning the equipment off and on,  
the user is encouraged to try to  
Notices for Customers in  
the U.S.A.  
IMPORTANT SAFETY  
INSTRUCTIONS -  
correct the interference by one or  
more of the following measures:  
SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS.  
Reorient or relocate the receiving  
antenna.  
DANGER - TO REDUCE THE RISK  
OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK,  
CAREFULLY FOLLOW THESE  
INSTRUCTIONS  
For connection to a supply not in the  
U.S.A., use an attachment plug  
adapter of the proper configuration  
for the power outlet if needed.  
The power supply unit is intended to  
be correctly orientated in a vertical or  
floor mount position.  
Increase the separation between  
the equipment and receiver.  
Connect the equipment into an  
outlet on a circuit different from  
that to which the receiver is  
connected.  
Consult the dealer or an  
experienced radio/television  
technician for help.  
Federal Communications  
Commission (FCC) Radio  
Frequency Interference  
Statement  
CAUTIONS  
This equipment has been tested and  
found to comply with the limits for a  
Class B digital device, pursuant to Part  
15 of the FCC rules. These limits are  
designed to provide reasonable  
protection against harmful  
Modifications  
The FCC requires the user to be  
notified that any changes or  
modifications made to this device  
that are not expressly approved by  
Nikon Corporation may void the  
user’s authority to operate the  
equipment.  
interference in a residential  
installation. This equipment  
generates, uses, and can radiate radio  
frequency energy and, if not installed  
and used in accordance with the  
instructions, may cause harmful  
interference to radio  
communications. However, there is  
no guarantee that interference will  
Interface Cables  
Use the interface cables sold or  
provided by Nikon for your  
equipment. Using other interface  
cables may exceed the limits of Class  
B Part 15 of the FCC rules.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
x
 
Notice for Customers in the State  
of California  
WARNING  
Notices for Customers in Europe  
CAUTIONS  
RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS  
REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT  
TYPE.  
Handling the cord on this product will  
expose you to lead, a chemical known  
to the State of California to cause birth  
defects or other reproductive harm.  
Wash hands after handling.  
Nikon Inc.,  
1300 Walt Whitman Road,  
Melville, New York 11747-3064  
USA  
DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES  
ACCORDING TO THE  
INSTRUCTIONS.  
This symbol indicates that  
electrical and electronic  
equipment is to be  
collected separately.  
The following apply only  
to users in European  
countries:  
Tel: 631-547-4200  
Notice for Customers in Canada  
CAN ICES-3 B / NMB-3 B  
This product is designated for  
separate collection at an  
appropriate collection point. Do  
not dispose of as household waste.  
Separate collection and recycling  
helps conserve natural resources  
and prevent negative  
consequences for human health  
and the environment that might  
result from incorrect disposal.  
For more information, contact the  
retailer or the local authorities in  
charge of waste management.  
This symbol on the  
battery indicates that the  
battery is to be collected  
separately.  
The following apply only  
to users in European countries:  
All batteries, whether marked with  
this symbol or not, are designated  
for separate collection at an  
appropriate collection point. Do  
not dispose of as household waste.  
For more information, contact the  
retailer or the local authorities in  
charge of waste management.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
xi  
Table of Contents  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
xii  
Functions That Can Be Set Using the nButton  
Functions That Can Be Set with the d Button  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
xiii  
Functions That Can Be Set Using the nButton  
(Quick Menu: When Recording Movies)..................................................................................... 95  
Functions That Can Be Set with the d Button  
(Movie and Movie Custom Setting Menus).............................................................................. 96  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
xiv  
dAuto Bracketing (Continuous Shooting  
While Changing the Exposure and White Balance).................................................... E38  
a Picture Control (COOLPIX Picture Control)  
(Changing the Settings for Image Recording)............................................................... E40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
xv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
xvi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
xvii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
xviii  
Parts of the Camera and Main  
Functions  
The Camera Body  
1
2
3
5
6 7 8  
9
10  
4
20 19  
18 17 161514 13 12  
11  
14 w1 (function 1) button ........4, 100  
Accessory Shoe Cover BS-1  
1
.............................................................. E108  
Accessory shoe.......................... E108  
Flash .............................................................. 59  
Microphone (stereo) .................88, 91  
Eyelet for camera strap....................... 8  
Exposure compensation dial....... 69  
Zoom control ........................................33  
f : wide-angle...........................33  
2
3
4
5
6
g : telephoto ..............................33  
h : thumbnail playback........87  
15  
i : playback zoom ..................86  
j : help...........................................39  
16 Sub-command dial...........3  
,
6,  
w2 (function 2) button  
.............................................................11, 101  
Exposure compensation  
dial mark..................................................... 69  
17  
7
Power connector cover (for  
optional AC adapter)............ E104  
8
9
Shutter-release button .............. 4, 34  
Mode dial................................................ 30  
Infrared receiver (for optional Remote  
18  
19  
20  
USB/audio/video output  
connector.............................................102  
10  
Control ML-L3)........................58,  
HDMI mini connector (Type C)  
.....................................................................102  
11 Lens ring.......................................E105  
12 Lens  
Self-timer lamp.................................... 62  
13  
AF-assist illuminator......................... 99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1
               
1
2
3
4
5 6 7  
8
9 10 11 12 13  
20 19  
18  
17 16  
15  
14  
Rotary multi selector  
(multi selector)* .......................... 3  
External microphone  
connector......................................E104  
12  
13  
14  
1
2
,
,
k (apply selection) button  
................................................................3  
Eyelet for camera strap.......................8  
,
3 K(flash pop-up) control ...........59  
Battery-chamber/  
memory card slot cover......... 22, 24  
4
5
6
Electronic viewfinder........................10  
Diopter adjustment control.........10  
x (monitor) button .......................10  
15 Tripod socket  
16 l (delete) button ............37, 98, 100  
7 n(quick menu) button.........70, 95  
d (menu) button  
17  
........................................12, 73, 88, 96, 99  
8
9
Power switch/power-on lamp....26  
Main command dial.........3 49 51  
18 Monitor........................................ 9, 11, 14  
,
,
,
19 Speaker...................................88, 97, 100  
10 g(AE-L/AF-L) button ............. 4, 100  
Accessory terminal  
20  
11 c (playback) button.......................36  
.................................101, E95, E104  
* Also referred to as the “multi selector“ in this manual.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2
       
Principle Functions of the Controls  
For Shooting  
Control  
Main Function  
A
Change the shooting mode.  
Mode dial  
Move toward g (i) (telephoto) to zoom in  
closer to the subject, and move toward f  
(h) (wide-angle) to zoom out and view a  
larger area.  
Zoom control  
While the shooting screen is displayed:  
Display the following setting screens by  
pressing:  
-
-
Up (H): m (flash mode)  
Left (J): n (self-timer/smile timer/  
remote control)  
-
-
Down (I): p (focus mode)  
Right (K): G (AF area mode)  
Multi selector  
While the setting screen/quick menu is  
displayed:  
Select an item using HIJK or by  
rotating the multi selector; apply the  
selection by pressing the k button.  
When the shooting mode is A:  
Set the flexible program.  
When the shooting mode is Bor D:  
Set the shutter speed.  
While the setting screen is displayed:  
Select an item.  
Main command dial  
Sub-command dial  
While the quick menu is displayed:  
Select an item on the left or right.  
When the shooting mode is Cor D:  
Set the aperture value.  
While the setting screen is displayed:  
Move between menu levels.  
While the quick menu is displayed:  
Select an item above or below.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
             
Control  
Main Function  
A
Display or exit the quick menu.  
n(quick menu) button  
Display and hide the menu.  
d (menu) button  
When pressed halfway (i.e., if you stop  
pressing when you feel resistance slightly):  
Set focus and exposure.  
When pressed all the way (i.e., if you press  
the button all the way down): Release the  
shutter.  
Shutter-release button  
Adjust the brightness (exposure  
compensation).  
Exposure compensation  
dial  
Lock the exposure or focus.  
AE-L/AF-L button  
When the zoom control is moved while  
pressing this button: Change the zoom  
lens focal length.  
When the shutter-release button is  
pressed while pressing this button: Shoot  
with the setting assigned in Fn1 +  
shutter button.  
When the command dial is rotated while 100  
pressing this button: Set the function  
assigned in Fn1 + command dial.  
When the multi selector is rotated while  
pressing this button: Set the function  
assigned in Fn1 + selector dial.  
w1 (function 1) button  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4
             
Control  
Main Function  
A
Switch the information displayed in the  
monitor.  
Set the function assigned in Fn2 button. 101  
w2 (function 2) button  
x (monitor) button  
Switch between the monitor and viewfinder. 10  
Play back images.  
c (playback) button  
Delete the last image that was saved.  
l (delete) button  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5
     
For Playback  
Control  
Main Function  
A
When the camera is turned off, press and hold 36  
this button to turn the camera on in playback  
mode.  
Return to shooting mode.  
c (playback) button  
Move toward ) to zoom in on the  
g
(i  
image, and move toward ) to  
f
(h  
display images as thumbnails or the  
calendar.  
Adjust the volume for voice memo and  
movie playback.  
Zoom control  
While the playback screen is displayed:  
Change the displayed image using up  
(H), left (J), down (I), right (K), or by  
rotating the multi selector.  
While the setting screen is displayed:  
Select an item using HIJK or by  
rotating the multi selector.  
While an enlarged image is displayed:  
Move the display area.  
Multi selector  
Display individual images of a sequence in 89,  
full-frame playback mode.  
Scroll an image shot with Easy panorama. 44,  
Play back movies.  
Switch from thumbnail playback or  
zoomed image display to full-frame  
playback.  
k (apply selection)  
button  
While the setting screen is displayed,  
apply the selection.  
Main command dial  
Sub-command dial  
Select images and date.  
Switch the magnification of an enlarged  
image.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6
                       
Control  
Main Function  
A
Display and hide the menu.  
d (menu) button  
Delete an image.  
l (delete) button  
Switch the information displayed in the  
monitor.  
w2 (function 2) button  
Switch between the monitor and viewfinder. 10  
x (monitor) button  
Return to shooting mode.  
Shutter-release button  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7
   
Attaching the Camera Strap  
Attach the strap at two places.  
Attaching and Detaching the Lens Cap  
B Lens Cap  
At times when you are not shooting images, attach the lens cap to the lens to  
protect it.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8
       
Opening and Adjusting the Angle of the Monitor  
The orientation and tilt of the monitor can be changed. This is useful when  
shooting with the camera in a high or a low position, or when taking self-  
portraits.  
For normal shooting, fold the monitor against the camera body with the screen  
facing out (3).  
When you are not using or carrying the  
camera, fold the monitor against the  
camera body with the screen facing inward  
to prevent scratches or contamination.  
B Notes About the Monitor  
When moving the monitor, do not apply excessive force and turn slowly within the  
monitor’s adjustable range so that the connection will not be damaged.  
When the monitor is turned with a cable connected to the external microphone  
connector or accessory terminal, the monitor may catch on the cable or cover. Do  
not apply excessive force to the cable or to the connector of the camera.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9
   
Switching Between the Monitor and Viewfinder  
(x Button)  
You can use the viewfinder when bright light  
under the open sky makes it difficult to see  
the monitor.  
Viewfinder  
Each press of the x button switches the  
display between the monitor and viewfinder.  
When you fold the monitor against the  
camera body with the screen facing  
inward, the display in the monitor is  
switched to the viewfinder.  
x (monitor) button  
Diopter Adjustment of the Viewfinder  
When the image in the viewfinder is difficult  
to see, adjust by rotating the diopter  
adjustment control while looking through the  
viewfinder.  
Take care not to scratch your eye with your  
fingertips or nails.  
Diopter adjustment control  
B Notes About Checking and Adjusting Image Colors  
Use the monitor on the back of the camera because the monitor has higher color  
reproducibility than the viewfinder.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10  
       
Switching the Monitor Display (Fn2 Button)  
To switch the information displayed in  
the monitor during shooting and  
playback, press the w2 (function 2)  
button.  
This operation is available when  
Fn2 button (A101) in the setup  
menu is set to Show/hide info  
(default setting).  
For Shooting  
1/250  
F5.6  
1280  
Show information  
Display the image and the shooting  
information.  
Hide information  
Display the image only.  
For Playback  
15/11/2013 15:30  
0004.JPG  
4/ 132  
1/250 F5.6  
4
132  
Show information  
Display the image and  
photo information.  
Tone level information  
(except movies)  
Display a histogram, tone  
level and shooting  
Hide information  
Display the image only.  
information (A19).  
C Virtual Horizon, Histogram and Framing Grid Displays for Shooting  
You can set the virtual horizon, histogram or framing grid (A16) to be displayed by  
selecting Monitor settings in the setup menu (A99) followed by Photo info.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11  
       
Using Menus (the d Button)  
Use the multi selector and k button to navigate the menus.  
1
Press the d button.  
The menu that matches the status of the camera, such as shooting or  
playback menu, is displayed.  
Unavailable menu items are displayed in gray and cannot be selected.  
Shooting menu  
Custom Picture Control  
Metering  
Continuous  
AF area mode  
Autofocus mode  
Flash exp. comp.  
1/250  
F5.6  
1280  
Noise reduction filter  
2
3
Use the multi selector to select a  
menu item.  
HI or rotation: Select an item above or  
below.  
JK: Select an item on the left or right, or  
move between menu levels.  
k: Apply a selection. Pressing K also applies  
a selection.  
See A13 for more information on how to switch tabs.  
Apply  
selection  
After completing the settings, press the d button or  
shutter-release button.  
Press the shutter-release button to display the shooting screen.  
C Notes About the Command Dial Operation When a Menu is  
Displayed  
Rotating the main command dial when a menu is displayed allows you to select an  
item. Rotating the sub-command dial allows you to move between menu levels.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
12  
           
Switching Among Menu Tabs  
To display a different menu, such as the setup menu (A99), use the multi  
selector to switch to another tab.  
Tabs  
Shooting menu  
Shooting menu  
Set up  
Welcome screen  
Time zone and date  
Monitor settings  
Print date  
Custom Picture Control  
Metering  
Continuous  
Custom Picture Control  
Metering  
Continuous  
AF area mode  
AF area mode  
Autofocus mode  
Flash exp. comp.  
Noise reduction filter  
Autofocus mode  
Flash exp. comp.  
Noise reduction filter  
Self-timer: after release  
Vibration reduction  
AF assist  
Use HI to select a  
tab, and press the k  
button or K to apply  
the selection.  
Use J to move to the  
tabs.  
Tab Types  
For Shooting  
For Playback  
Playback  
Qu  
Shooting  
Set up  
User setti  
Custo  
Meter  
Contin  
AF are  
Autof  
Flash  
Save u  
Reset  
Shoot  
Focal le  
Photo  
Virtua  
Initial  
Welco  
Time z  
Monit  
Print d  
Self-ti  
Vibrat  
AF ass  
D-L  
Ski  
Filt  
Prin  
Slid  
De  
Noise  
Atab:  
Displays the settings available for the  
current shooting mode (A31).  
Depending on the current shooting  
mode, the tab icon that is displayed  
will be different. In A (auto) mode,  
only z tab is displayed.  
c tab:  
Displays the settings available for the  
playback mode.  
E/F/Ntab:  
Displays the settings for the  
specialized menu in E, For N  
mode (A55).  
z tab:  
Displays the setup menu, where you can change general settings.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
13  
   
The Monitor  
The information that is displayed in the monitor during shooting and playback  
changes depending on the camera’s settings and state of use. Press the  
w2  
button to show or hide the information in the monitor (  
A11).  
For Shooting  
45  
4
5
6
7
8
44  
43  
9
3
12 13  
14 15  
16 17  
2
42  
41  
1
1011  
40  
39  
19  
20  
18  
21  
22  
23  
38  
36  
37  
35  
1/250  
F5.6  
999  
32 31  
33  
24  
25  
1m 0s  
1m 0s  
30  
999  
9999  
34  
29  
28  
26  
27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
14  
     
Image size............................................... 72  
Easy panorama.....................................44  
26  
27  
Shooting mode............................30, 31  
Focus mode............................................65  
Focus indicator.....................................34  
Quick menu icon.........................70, 95  
Zoom indicator.............................33, 65  
Zoom memory.....................................74  
Zoom speed setting..........................99  
AE/AF-L indicator...............100, E6  
Flash mode .............................................59  
Speedlight...............................................61  
Flash exp. comp...................................74  
Battery level indicator ......................26  
Vibration reduction icon.................99  
1
2
Movie options (normal  
speed movies)......................................95  
3
28  
29  
30  
4
Movie options (HS movies) ...........95  
5
Number of exposures remaining  
(still images)..........................26, E28  
6
7
Internal memory indicator ...........26  
Aperture value .....................................49  
Shutter speed.......................................49  
Exposure indicator.............................51  
ISO sensitivity................................ 72, 95  
Exposure compensation value...69  
Active D-Lighting...............................74  
Built-in ND filter................................... 74  
COOLPIX Picture Control....... 72, 95  
White balance .............................. 72, 95  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
Eye-Fi communication  
indicator................................ 101, E96  
14  
Distortion control ...............................74  
GPS reception ................ 101, E114  
Noise reduction filter........................74  
Wind noise reduction.......................97  
“Date not set” indicator...........28, 99  
Travel destination icon ....................99  
Print date..................................................99  
Metering...................................................73  
Fn1 guide display........................4, 101  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
Continuous shooting  
mode ................................................ 45, 73  
41  
Backlighting (HDR) ............................43  
Auto bracketing ..................................72  
Hand-held/tripod...............................41  
Self-timer indicator............................62  
Remote control....................................58  
Smile timer .............................................63  
Pet portrait auto release.................45  
42  
43  
44  
45  
Movie recording time  
remaining.........................................91, 92  
24  
25  
Image quality.........................................72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
15  
 
1/1200 F2.8  
1280  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
9
8
1/1200 F2.8  
1280  
1/1200 F2.8  
1280  
11  
10  
1/1200 F2.8  
1280  
1/1200 F2.8  
1280  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
16  
   
Focus area (for center)  
................................................58, 67, 73, 85  
1
2
3
4
5
Focus area (for manual)  
........................................41, 42, 58, 67, 73  
Focus area (auto, target  
finding AF).......................58, 67, 73, 82  
Focus area (face detection, pet  
detection)........45, 58, 63, 67, 73, 83  
Focus area (subject tracking)  
....................................... 58, 67, 73, E51  
Spot metering area............................73  
Center-weighted area......................73  
6
7
Virtual horizon (bars)  
...............................................11, 99, E75  
8
9
Virtual horizon (circle)  
...............................................11, 99, E75  
View/hide histograms  
...............................................11, 99, E75  
10  
11  
View/hide framing grid  
...............................................11, 99, E75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
17  
For Playback  
Full-frame playback (A36)  
4
1
2
3
5
6
15/11/2013 12:00  
9999.JPG  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
7
8
9
21  
20  
11 12  
13  
10  
19  
999/ 999  
18  
17 16  
14  
15  
1m 0s  
1m 0s  
999/ 999  
9999/9999  
a
b
(a) Current image number/total  
number of images  
(b) Movie length  
Date of recording............................... 28  
Time of recording............................... 28  
Voice memo indicator..................... 88  
Battery level indicator...................... 26  
Protect icon............................................ 88  
1
2
3
4
5
15  
16  
Internal memory indicator........... 25  
Easy panorama  
playback guide..................6, 44 ,E4  
Sequence playback guide  
.....................................................6, 37, E7  
Movie playback guide..................... 97  
17  
Eye-Fi communication  
indicator................................101, E96  
6
7
Recorded GPS information  
indicator.............................101, E113  
Volume indicator.........................88, 97  
Black border icon ............................... 89  
D-Lighting icon................................... 88  
Quick retouch icon............................ 88  
Filter effects icon ................................ 88  
Straighten icon.................................... 89  
Skin softening icon ........................... 88  
Sequence display (when Individual  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
Small picture icon.............................. 88  
Crop icon................................................. 86  
Print order icon.................................... 88  
Image quality........................................ 72  
Image size............................................... 72  
Movie options .............................. 95, 97  
Easy panorama indicator............... 44  
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
25  
26  
pictures is selected) ........89,  
File number and type...........E103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
18  
 
1
Tone level information display (A11)  
1
3
2
4
11  
5
10  
1/250 F5.6  
4
132  
9
8
7
6
Current image number/  
total number of images  
ISO sensitivity........................................ 72  
Exposure compensation value... 69  
White balance ...................................... 72  
COOLPIX Picture Control............... 72  
Image quality/Image size.............. 72  
1
2
3
4
5
6
Aperture value..................................... 49  
Shutter speed....................................... 49  
7
8
2
Shooting mode ................................. 31  
9
3
Tone level  
10  
11  
4
Histogram  
1
You can check for loss of contrast detail in highlights and shadows from the  
histogram that is displayed, or the flashing display for each tone level. These  
provide guidelines when adjusting the image brightness with functions such as  
exposure compensation.  
Ais displayed when the shooting mode A, y, u or Ais selected.  
The tone level indicates the brightness level. When the tone level to check is  
selected using the multi selector JK, the area of the image that corresponds to  
the selected tone level flashes.  
2
3
4
A histogram is a graph showing the distribution of tones in the image. The  
horizontal axis corresponds to pixel brightness, with dark tones to the left and  
bright tones to the right. The vertical axis shows the number of pixels.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
19  
       
The Basics of Shooting and  
Playback  
Preparation 1 Charge the Battery  
1
Prepare the included battery charger.  
If a plug adapter* is included with your camera,  
attach the plug adapter to the plug on the battery  
charger. Push the plug adapter firmly until it is  
securely held in place. Once the two are  
connected, attempting to forcibly remove the plug  
adapter could damage the product.  
*
The shape of the plug adapter varies according  
to the country or region in which the camera  
was purchased.  
This step can be omitted if the plug adapter  
comes permanently bonded to the battery  
charger.  
2
While pushing in the battery (1), set it into the battery  
charger (2).  
1
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
20  
       
3
Plug the battery charger into an  
electrical outlet.  
CHARGE lamp starts flashing when charging  
starts.  
CHARGE  
lamp  
CHARGE lamp  
Flashes  
Description  
The battery is charging.  
The battery is fully charged.  
About 1 hour and 30 minutes are required to charge a fully  
exhausted battery.  
On  
The battery is set incorrectly. Disconnect the battery charger  
from the electrical outlet, remove the battery, and then reset  
the battery to lie flat in the battery charger.  
The ambient temperature is not suited to charging. Charge  
the battery indoors with an ambient temperature of 5°C to  
35°C (41°F to 95°F).  
There is a problem with the battery. Immediately disconnect  
the battery charger from the electrical outlet, and stop  
charging. Take the battery and battery charger to your retailer  
or Nikon-authorized service representative.  
Flashes quickly  
4
When charging is complete, remove the battery and then  
disconnect the battery charger from the electrical outlet.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
21  
Preparation 2 Insert the Battery  
1
Open the battery-chamber/  
memory card slot cover.  
2
Insert the battery.  
Push the orange battery latch in the  
direction indicated by the arrow (1), and  
fully insert the battery (2).  
The battery locks into place when inserted  
correctly.  
Battery latch  
B Be Careful to Insert the Battery in  
Correct Direction  
Inserting the battery upside down or  
backwards could damage the camera.  
3
Close the battery-chamber/  
memory card slot cover.  
While the battery-chamber/memory card  
slot cover is open, the camera cannot be  
turned on.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
22  
   
Removing the Battery  
Turn the camera off and make sure that the  
power-on lamp and the monitor have turned off,  
and then open the battery-chamber/memory  
card slot cover.  
Move the battery latch in the direction indicated  
by the arrow (1) to eject the battery (2).  
B High Temperature Caution  
The camera, battery, and memory card may be hot immediately after using the  
camera.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
23  
Preparation 3 Insert a Memory Card  
1
Turn off the camera and open the  
battery-chamber/memory card  
slot cover.  
2
3
Insert the memory card.  
Slide the memory card in until it  
clicks into place.  
Memory  
card slot  
B Be Careful to Insert the  
Memory Card in Correct Direction  
Inserting the memory card upside down or  
backwards could damage the camera and  
the memory card.  
Close the battery-chamber/  
memory card slot cover.  
B Formatting Memory Cards  
The first time you insert a memory card that has been used in another device  
into this camera, make sure to format it with this camera. Insert the card into  
the camera, press the d button, and select Format card in the setup menu.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
24  
     
Removing Memory Cards  
Turn the camera off and make sure that the  
power-on lamp and the monitor have turned  
off, and then open the battery-chamber/  
memory card slot cover.  
Gently push the memory card into the camera  
(1) to partially eject the card (2).  
B High Temperature Caution  
The camera, battery, and memory card may be hot immediately after using the  
camera.  
Internal Memory and Memory Cards  
Camera data, including images and movies, can be saved either in the camera’s  
internal memory or on a memory card. To use the camera’s internal memory,  
first remove the memory card.  
Approved Memory Cards  
The following Secure Digital (SD) memory cards have been tested and  
approved for use in this camera.  
Memory cards with an SD Speed Class rating of 6 or faster are  
recommended for recording movies. When using a memory card with a  
lower Speed Class rating, movie recording may stop unexpectedly.  
2
3
SD memory cards SDHC memory cards  
1
SDXC memory cards  
SanDisk  
2 GB  
4 GB, 8 GB, 16 GB, 32 GB 64 GB, 128 GB  
TOSHIBA  
4 GB, 8 GB, 16 GB, 32 GB 64 GB  
-
1
Panasonic 2 GB  
4 GB, 8 GB, 16 GB, 32 GB 64 GB  
Lexar  
4 GB, 8 GB, 16 GB, 32 GB 64 GB, 128 GB  
-
1
2
If the memory card will be used with a card reader or similar device, make sure that  
the device supports 2 GB cards.  
SDHC-compliant. If the memory card will be used with a card reader  
or similar device, make sure that the device supports SDHC.  
3
SDXC-compliant. If the memory card will be used with a card reader  
or similar device, make sure that the device supports SDXC.  
Contact the manufacturer for details on the above cards. We  
cannot guarantee camera performance when using memory cards made by  
other manufacturers.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
25  
         
Step 1 Turn the Camera On  
1
Open the monitor and remove the lens cap.  
information.  
2
3
Press the power switch.  
If you are turning the camera on  
for the first time, see “Setting the  
The monitor turns on.  
To turn the camera off, press the  
power switch again.  
Check the battery level indicator and the number of  
exposures remaining.  
Battery level indicator  
Number of exposures  
remaining  
1/250  
F5.6  
1280  
Battery level indicator  
Display  
Description  
b
B
The battery level is high.  
The battery level is low.  
N
The camera cannot capture images. Recharge the  
battery.  
Battery exhausted.  
Number of Exposures Remaining  
The number of images that can be taken is displayed.  
Cis displayed when no memory card is inserted in the camera, and images  
are saved in the internal memory.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
26  
           
C The Auto Off Function  
Flashes  
No operations  
performed  
No operations  
performed  
3 min  
1/250  
F5.6  
1280  
Camera enters  
standby mode.  
Camera turns off.  
The time that elapses before the camera enters standby mode is about 1 minute.  
The time can be changed using the Auto off setting in the setup menu (A99).  
While the camera is in standby mode, the monitor turns back on if you perform any  
of the following operations:  
- Press the power switch, shutter-release button, or c button.  
- Rotate the mode dial.  
- Open or close the monitor.  
C Monitor Display  
Press the w2 button to switch between showing and hiding the photo information  
or shooting information that is displayed in the monitor (A11).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
27  
 
Setting the Display Language, Date, and Time  
When the camera is turned on for the first time, the language-selection screen  
and the date and time setting screen for the camera clock are displayed.  
If you exit without setting the date and time, Owill flash when the shooting  
screen is displayed.  
1
Use the multi selector  
HI to select the  
desired language and  
press the k button.  
Language  
Български  
Čeština  
Dansk  
Deutsch  
English  
Español  
Cancel  
2
3
Select Yes and press the k button.  
Time zone and date  
Choose time zone and  
set date and time?  
Yes  
No  
Cancel  
Selectyourhometime  
zone and press the k  
button.  
London  
Casablanca  
To enable daylight saving  
time, press H. When the  
daylight saving time  
Back  
function is enabled, W is  
displayed above the map.  
To turn off the daylight saving time function, press I.  
4
Select the date format and press  
the k button.  
Date format  
Year/Month/Day  
Month/Day/Year  
Day/Month/Year  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
28  
           
5
6
Set the date and time, and press  
the k button.  
Date and time  
D
M
Y
2013  
Select a field: Press JK (changes between  
D, M, Y, hour, and minute).  
15  
11  
15  
10  
Edit the date and time: Press HI.  
Date and time can also be changed by  
rotating the multi selector or main  
command dial.  
Edit  
Confirm the setting: Select the minute field and press the k button.  
Select Yes and press the k  
button.  
Date and time  
15/11/2013 15:10  
OK?  
When settings are finished, the lens extends  
and the camera switches to shooting mode.  
Yes  
No  
C Changing the Language Setting and the Date and Time Setting  
You can change these settings using the Language and Time zone and date  
settings in the z setup menu (A99).  
You can enable or disable daylight saving time in the z setup menu by selecting  
Time zone and date followed by Time zone. Enabling day light saving time  
moves the clock forward one hour, and disabling it moves the clock back one hour.  
C The Clock Battery  
The camera's clock is powered by a built-in backup battery.  
The backup battery charges when the main battery is inserted into the camera or  
when the camera is connected to an optional AC adapter, and it can run the clock  
for several days after about 10 hours of charging.  
If the camera’s backup battery becomes exhausted, the date and time setting  
screen is displayed when the camera is turned on. Set the date and time again. See  
information.  
C Imprinting the Shooting Date on Printed Images  
You can permanently imprint the shooting date on images as they are captured by  
setting Print date in the setup menu.  
If you want the shooting date to be printed without using the Print date setting,  
print using the ViewNX 2 software (A104).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
29  
   
Step 2 Select a Shooting Mode  
Rotate the mode dial to select a shooting mode.  
A (auto) mode is used in this example. Rotate the mode dial to A.  
C Notes About the Flash  
In situations where a flash is needed, such as in dark locations or when the subject is  
backlit, make sure to raise the flash (A59).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
30  
         
Available Shooting Modes  
A
Auto mode  
Used for general shooting.  
Scene mode  
(A39)  
y
Camera settings are optimized according to the scene that you select.  
When using scene auto selector, the camera automatically selects the  
optimum scene mode when you frame an image, making it even easier  
to take images using settings that suit the scene.  
(A46)  
u
Special effects  
Effects can be applied to images during shooting.  
(A49)  
A, B, C, Dmode  
Select these modes for greater control over shutter speed and aperture  
value.  
(A55)  
E, F, NUser settings mode  
Setting combinations that are frequently used for shooting can be saved.  
The saved settings can be immediately retrieved for shooting simply by  
rotating the mode dial to E, For N.  
(A91)  
e
Movie mode  
You can record slow motion and fast motion movies, in addition to basic  
movies.  
(A91)  
h
Movie custom setting mode  
You can use aperture-priority auto or manual mode, or change the  
settings for image recording.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
31  
   
Step 3 Frame a Picture  
1
Hold the camera steady.  
Keep fingers and other objects away from the lens, flash, AF-assist illuminator,  
microphone, and speaker.  
When taking pictures in portrait (“tall“) orientation, turn the camera so that  
the flash is above the lens.  
2
Frame the picture.  
1/250  
F5.6  
1280  
C Viewfinder  
By pressing the x button, you can shoot while looking through the viewfinder  
(A10).  
C When Using a Tripod  
We recommend using a tripod to stabilize the camera in the following situations.  
-
When shooting in dim lighting with the flash lowered, or in a shooting mode in  
which the flash is disabled  
-
When using the telephoto setting  
When using a tripod to stabilize the camera during shooting, set Vibration  
reduction to Off in the setup menu (A99) to prevent potential errors caused by  
this function.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
32  
     
Using the Zoom  
Zoom out  
Zoom in  
When you move the zoom control, the zoom  
lens position changes.  
To zoom in closer to the subject: Move  
toward g (telephoto)  
To zoom out and view a larger area: Move  
toward f (wide-angle)  
A zoom indicator is displayed at the top of  
the monitor when the zoom control is moved.  
Digital zoom, which allows you to further  
magnify the subject up to approximately 4× the  
maximum optical zoom ratio, can be activated  
by moving and holding the zoom control  
Optical  
zoom  
Digital  
zoom  
toward g when the camera is zoomed in to the maximum optical zoom  
position.  
C Digital Zoom and Interpolation  
While using digital zoom, the image quality  
decreases due to interpolation when the zoom is  
increased beyond the Vposition.  
The position of Vmoves to the right as the size of  
an image decreases.  
Small image size  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
33  
       
Step 4 Focus and Shoot  
1
Press the shutter-release  
button halfway.  
When the subject is in focus, the  
focus area that includes the subject  
or focus indicator (A14) glows  
green (multiple focus areas can  
glow green).  
When you are using digital zoom,  
the camera focuses on the subject  
in the center of the frame and the  
focus area is not displayed. When  
the camera has focused, the focus  
indicator glows green.  
If the focus area or focus indicator  
flashes red, the camera is unable to  
focus. Modify the composition and  
try pressing the shutter-release  
button halfway again.  
1/250  
F5.6  
2
Without lifting your finger, press  
the shutter-release button the rest  
of the way down.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
34  
     
The Shutter-release Button  
To set focus and exposure (shutter speed and  
aperture value), press the shutter-release button  
lightly until you feel a slight resistance. Focus and  
exposure remain locked while the shutter-release  
button is pressed halfway.  
Press halfway  
Press the shutter-release button all the way to  
release the shutter and take an image.  
Do not use force when pressing the shutter-  
release button, as this may result in camera shake  
and blurred images. Press the button gently.  
Press all the  
way  
B Notes About Saving Images and Recording Movies  
The indicator showing the number of exposures remaining or the indicator showing  
the maximum movie length flashes while images are being saved or while a movie is  
being recorded. Do not open the battery-chamber/memory card slot cover or  
remove the battery or memory card while an indicator is flashing. Doing this could  
result in loss of data, or in damage to the camera or the memory card.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
35  
 
Step 5 Play Back Images  
1
Press the c (playback)  
button.  
If you press and hold down  
the c (playback) button  
while the camera is turned off,  
the camera turns on in  
playback mode.  
c (playback)  
button  
Multi selector  
2
Use the multi selector to select  
an image to display.  
Display the previous image  
Press and hold down HIJK to scroll  
through the images quickly.  
Images can also be selected by rotating  
the multi selector or command dial.  
To return to shooting mode, press the c  
button or shutter-release button.  
Display the next image  
15/11/22013 15:30  
0004.JPG  
4
132  
C Switching the Information in the Monitor  
Press the w2 button to switch between showing and hiding the photo information  
or shooting information that is displayed in the monitor (A11).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
36  
           
Step 6 Delete an Image  
1
Press the l button to  
delete the image  
currently displayed in the  
monitor.  
2
Use the multi selector HI to  
select Yes and press the k  
button.  
Erase 1 image?  
The deleted image cannot be recovered.  
To cancel, select No and press the k  
button.  
Yes  
No  
B Notes About RAW and JPEG Images Recorded at the Same Time  
When images taken with an Image quality (A72) setting of RAW (NRW) + Fine or  
RAW (NRW) + Normal are deleted with the l button, both the RAW (NRW) and  
JPEG images that were recorded at the same time are deleted.  
To delete only RAW (NRW) images or JPEG images, select Erase selected NRW  
images or Erase selected JPEG images in Delete of the playback menu (A88).  
B Deleting Images in a Sequence  
If you press the l button and delete a key picture while only key pictures are  
displayed for sequences of images (A89), all images in the sequence, including  
the key picture, are deleted.  
To delete individual images in a sequence, press the k button to display them  
one at a time and press the l button.  
C Deleting the Last Image Captured While in Shooting Mode  
When using shooting mode, press the l button to delete the last image that was  
saved.  
C Deleting Multiple Images  
To delete multiple images, select Delete from the playback menu (A88).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
37  
           
Shooting Features  
A (Auto) Mode  
Used for general shooting.  
The camera selects the focus area for autofocus  
in accordance with the composition or subject.  
The camera automatically selects one or more  
of the 9 focus areas containing the subject  
closest to the camera. When the subject is in  
focus, the focus areas that are in focus glow  
green.  
See “Focusing” (A 82) for more information.  
Functions Available in A (Auto) Mode  
Flash mode (A59)  
Self-timer (A62)  
Focus mode (A64)  
Exposure compensation (A69)  
Quick menu (A70)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
38  
         
Scene Mode (Shooting Suited to Scenes)  
When a scene is selected, camera settings are automatically optimized for the  
selected scene.  
Scene menu  
Scene auto selector  
Portrait  
Landscape  
Sports  
Night portrait  
Party/indoor  
Beach  
Press the d button to display the scene menu and select a scene using the  
multi selector.  
x
Scene auto selector (default setting)  
2
j Night landscape (A41)  
b Portrait  
c Landscape  
k Close-up (A41)  
2
u
Food (A42)  
l Museum (A42)  
m Fireworks show (A42)  
1
1
d Sports (A40)  
3
2, 3  
e Night portrait (A40)  
1
1
f Party/indoor (A41)  
n Black and white copy (A42)  
1
1
Z Beach  
o Backlighting (A43)  
1
z Snow  
p Panorama (A44)  
2, 3  
h Sunset  
O Pet portrait (A45)  
2, 3  
i Dusk/dawn  
1
2
3
The camera focuses on the area in the center of the frame.  
The camera focuses at infinity.  
Use of a tripod is recommended, because the shutter speed is slow. Set Vibration  
reduction to Off in the setup menu (A99) when using a tripod to stabilize the  
camera during shooting.  
To View a Description (Help Display) of Each Scene  
Select a scene and move the zoom control (A1) toward g (j) to view a  
description of that scene. To return to the original screen, move the zoom  
control toward g (j) again.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
39  
         
Tips and Notes  
x Scene auto selector  
When you point the camera at the subject, the camera automatically selects the  
optimum scene mode from the list below and adjusts the shooting settings  
accordingly.  
e
Portrait (close-up image of one to two persons)  
Portrait (shooting an image of three or more persons or shooting a  
composition with a large background area)  
b
f
h
Landscape  
Night portrait (close-up image of one to two persons)  
Night portrait (shooting an image of three or more persons or shooting  
a composition with a large background area)  
c
Night landscape  
The camera shoots images continuously and combines and saves  
them as one image in the same way as when Hand-held in j  
(night landscape) (A41) is selected.  
g
i
j
d
d
Close-up  
Backlighting (shooting non-human subjects)  
Backlighting (shooting human subjects)  
Other shooting scenes  
Depending upon shooting conditions, the camera may not select the desired  
scene mode. Should this occur, switch to A (auto) mode (A30) or select the  
optimum scene mode for the subject manually.  
d Sports  
While the shutter-release button is held all the way down, the camera shoots up  
to about 6 images continuously at a rate of about 8 fps (when image quality is  
set to Normal and image size is set to F 4000×3000).  
The frame rate for continuous shooting may become slow depending upon the  
current image quality setting, image size setting, the memory card used, or  
shooting condition.  
Focus, exposure, and hue are fixed at the values determined with the first image  
in each series.  
e Night portrait  
The flash always fires. Raise the flash before shooting.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
40  
             
f Party/indoor  
To avoid the effects of camera shake, hold the camera steady. Set Vibration  
reduction to Off in the setup menu (A99) when using a tripod to stabilize the  
camera during shooting.  
j Night landscape  
From the screen displayed after j Night landscape is selected, select Y  
Hand-held or Z Tripod.  
Y Hand-held (default setting):  
Press the shutter-release button all the way to capture a series of images which  
are combined into a single image and saved.  
-
-
Once the shutter-release button is pressed all the way, hold the camera still  
until a still image is displayed. After taking an image, do not turn the camera  
off before the monitor switches to the shooting screen.  
-
The angle of view (i.e., the area visible in the frame) seen in the saved image is  
narrower than that seen in the monitor at the time of shooting.  
Z Tripod:  
-
One image is captured at a slow shutter speed when the shutter-release  
button is pressed all the way.  
-
Vibration reduction is disabled even when Vibration reduction (A99) in  
the setup menu is set to On.  
k Close-up  
The focus mode (A64) setting is changed to C (close range only) and the  
camera automatically zooms to the closest position at which it can focus.  
You can move the focus area. Press the k button, use the multi selector  
HIJK or rotate it to move the focus area, and press the k button to apply  
the setting.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
41  
             
u Food  
The focus mode (A64) setting is changed to p  
(macro close-up) and the camera automatically  
zooms to the closest position at which it can  
focus.  
You can adjust hue by using the multi selector  
HI. The hue setting is saved in the camera’s  
memory even after the camera is turned off.  
You can move the focus area. Press the k  
button, use the multi selector HIJK or rotate  
1/250  
F5.6  
1280  
it to move the focus area, and press the k button to apply the setting.  
l Museum  
The camera captures a series of up to 10 images while the shutter-release  
button is held all the way down, and the sharpest image in the series is  
automatically selected and saved (BSS (Best Shot Selector)).  
The flash does not fire.  
m Fireworks show  
The shutter speed is fixed at about 4 seconds.  
The zoom position moved one step toward the wide-angle position from the  
maximum optical zoom position cannot be used.  
n Black and white copy  
Use together with p (macro close-up) focus mode (A64) when shooting  
subjects that are close to the camera.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
42  
                 
o Backlighting  
From the screen displayed after o Backlighting is selected, HDR (high  
dynamic range) composition can be set.  
Off (default setting): The flash fires to prevent the subject from being hidden in  
shadow. Shoot images with the flash raised.  
Level 1-Level 3: Use when taking images with very bright and dark areas in the  
same frame. Select Level 1 when there is less difference between bright and dark  
areas, and Level 3 when there is more difference between bright and dark areas.  
B Notes About HDR  
Use of a tripod is recommended. Set Vibration reduction in the setup menu  
(A99) to Off when using a tripod to stabilize the camera.  
The angle of view (i.e., the area visible in the frame) seen in the saved image is  
narrower than that seen in the monitor at the time of shooting.  
When the shutter-release button is pressed all the way, the camera shoots images  
continuously and saves the following two images.  
- A non-HDR composite image  
- An HDR composite image in which the loss of details in highlights or shadows is  
minimized  
If there is only enough memory to save one image, an image processed by D-  
Lighting (A88) at the time of shooting, in which dark areas of the image are  
corrected, is the only image saved.  
Once the shutter-release button is pressed all the way, hold the camera still until a  
still image is displayed. After taking an image, do not turn the camera off before the  
monitor switches to the shooting screen.  
Depending on the shooting conditions, dark shadows may appear around bright  
subjects and bright areas may appear around dark subjects. You can compensate  
by lowering the level setting.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
43  
   
p Panorama  
From the screen displayed after p Panorama is selected, select V Easy  
panorama or U Panorama assist.  
Easy panorama (default setting): You can take a panorama image simply by  
moving the camera in the desired direction.  
-
Shooting range can be selected from Normal (180°) (default setting) or  
Wide (360°).  
-
-
The zoom position is fixed at wide-angle.  
Press the shutter-release button all the way down, remove your finger from  
the button, and then slowly pan the camera horizontally. Shooting ends  
when the camera captures the specified shooting range.  
Focus and exposure are locked when shooting starts.  
If you press the k button when a captured image is displayed in full-frame  
playback mode, the image scrolls automatically. The images cannot be edited  
on this camera.  
-
-
information.  
Panorama assist: Use this mode when shooting a series of images that can  
later be joined on a computer to form a single panorama.  
- Use the multi selector HIJK to select the direction in which images are to  
be joined and press the k button.  
- After shooting the first image, shoot the necessary number of images while  
confirming the seams. To finish shooting, press the k button.  
- Transfer taken images to a computer and use the Panorama Maker software  
(A105) to join them in a single panorama.  
See “Using Panorama Assist” (E5) for more information.  
B Notes About Printing Panorama Images  
The entire image may not be able to be printed depending on the printer’s settings.  
Additionally, printing may not be possible depending on the printer.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
44  
         
O Pet portrait  
When you point the camera at a dog or cat, the camera detects the pet’s face  
and focuses on it. By default, the shutter is automatically released when focus is  
acquired (pet portrait auto release).  
From the screen displayed after O Pet portrait is selected, select Single or  
Continuous.  
-
-
Single: Whenever the detected face is in focus, the camera captures 1 image.  
Continuous: Whenever the detected face is in focus, the camera captures  
3 images continuously.  
B Pet Portrait Auto Release  
Press the multi selector J (n) to change the Pet portrait auto release settings.  
- Y: The camera detects a dog or cat face and automatically releases the shutter  
when the detected face is in focus.  
-
OFF: The camera does not release the shutter automatically, even if a dog or cat  
face is detected. Press the shutter-release button. The camera also detects  
human faces when OFF is selected.  
• Pet portrait auto release is set to OFF after 5 bursts have been taken.  
Shooting is also possible by pressing the shutter-release button, regardless of the  
Pet portrait auto release setting. When Continuous is selected, you can take  
images continuously while holding down the shutter-release button all the way.  
B Focus Area  
When the camera detects a face, the face is  
displayed inside a yellow border. When the  
camera acquires focus on a face displayed inside  
a double border (focus area), the double border  
turns green. If no faces are detected, the camera  
focuses on the subject in the center of the frame.  
1/250  
F5.6  
1280  
In some shooting conditions, the pet face may  
not be detected and other subjects may be  
displayed inside a border.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
45  
       
Special Effects Mode (Applying Effects When  
Shooting)  
Effects can be applied to images during shooting.  
Special effects  
Special effects  
AF area mode  
Special effects  
Creative monochrome  
Painting  
Zoom eexposure  
Defocuus duriinngg eexpposure  
Cross process  
Soft  
Nostalgiic sepia  
Press the d button to display the special effects menu and select an effect  
using the multi selector.  
Creates monochrome photographs by adjusting the  
grainy feel and contrast. Monochrome photographs with  
the dark and light tones reversed can also be created  
(solarization).  
Creative  
monochrome  
(default setting)  
Rotate the main command dial to adjust grainy feel.  
Rotate the sub-command dial to adjust contrast.  
Painting  
Gives the image a painting-like appearance.  
Creates dynamic images converging toward the center of  
the frame by moving the zoom position from the wide-  
angle to telephoto zoom position until the shutter closes.  
The zooming magnification can be set to 2× or 3×  
(default setting) by rotating the main command dial.  
The zoom is fixed at the wide-angle end before  
shooting.  
Zoom exposure*  
AF area mode (A58, 73) is fixed at Center (normal).  
The shutter speed is fixed at 2 seconds, and the effect  
can be produced only when the shooting mode icon on  
the shooting screen is green.  
When a shutter speed that is slow enough for zoom  
exposure cannot be obtained due to too bright a  
subject, etc., the shooting mode icon does not turn  
green, and the effect will not be produced.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
46  
     
Creates images with a soft blur by varying focus slightly  
until the shutter closes.  
The effect can be produced only when the shooting  
mode icon on the shooting screen is green.  
Defocus during  
exposure*  
When a shutter speed that is slow enough for defocus  
during exposure cannot be obtained due to too bright a  
subject, etc., the shooting mode icon does not turn  
green, and the effect will not be produced.  
The desired effect may not be produced depending on  
shooting conditions such as the distance to the subject.  
Creates images with an unusual hue by converting a  
positive color image into negative or negative color image  
into positive.  
Cross process  
Rotate the main command dial to select hue.  
Softens the image by adding a slight blur to the entire  
image.  
Soft  
Adds a sepia tone and reduces the contrast to simulate the  
qualities of an old photograph.  
Nostalgic sepia  
High key  
Low key  
Gives the entire image a bright tone.  
Gives the entire image a dark tone.  
Creates a black and white image in which only the  
specified color remains.  
Rotate the main  
command dial to  
select the color to be  
retained from the  
slider.  
Selective color  
Press the k button  
to hide the slider and  
cancel color  
Save  
1/250 F5.6  
selection. To display  
the slider again, press  
the k button again.  
Slider  
*
Use of a tripod is recommended during Zoom exposure or Defocus during  
exposure. Vibration reduction will not function even if Vibration reduction  
in the setup menu is set to On.  
The focus area for autofocus differs depending on the setting of AF area  
When AF area mode is set to Auto (default setting), the camera  
automatically selects one or more of the 9 focus areas containing the  
subject closest to the camera. When the subject is in focus, the focus areas  
that are in focus glow green.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
47  
Functions Available in Special Effects Mode  
AF area mode (A58, 73)  
Flash mode (A59)  
Self-timer (A62)  
Focus mode (A64)  
Exposure compensation (A69)  
Special effects menu (A46)  
Quick menu (A70)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
48  
A
,
B
,
C
,
D
Modes (Setting the Exposure for  
Shooting)  
Images can be shot with greater control by  
setting the quick menu (A70) or shooting  
menu (A73) items in addition to setting the  
shutter speed or aperture value manually  
according to shooting conditions and  
requirements.  
The focus area for autofocus differs depending  
on the setting of AF area mode (A58, 73).  
When AF area mode is set to Center (normal) (default setting), the  
camera focuses on the area in the center of the frame.  
Rotate the command dial to set the shutter speed and aperture value.  
Sub-command dial  
Main command dial  
1/250  
F5.6  
1280  
Aperture  
value  
Shutter speed  
Exposure mode  
Aperture value (A50)  
Shutter speed (A53)  
Programmed auto  
(A51)  
Automatically adjusted (flexible program is enabled by  
the main command dial).  
A
Shutter-priority  
auto (A51)  
Adjusted by the main  
Automatically adjusted.  
command dial.  
B
Aperture-priority  
auto (A51)  
Adjusted by the sub-  
Automatically adjusted.  
C
D
command dial.  
Adjusted by the sub-  
command dial.  
Adjusted by the main  
command dial.  
Manual (A51)  
C More Information  
See “Customize command dials” (A100) for more information.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
49  
               
Exposure  
The procedure for shooting images at the desired brightness (exposure) by  
adjusting the shutter speed or aperture value is called “determine exposure”.  
The sense of dynamism and amount of background defocus in images to be  
shot vary depending on the combinations of shutter speed and aperture value  
even if the exposure is the same.  
Adjusting the Shutter Speed  
In Bmode, the range is from a maximum of 1/4000 to 15 seconds.  
In Dmode, the range is from a maximum of 1/4000 to 60 seconds.  
Faster 1/1000 s  
Slower 1/30 s  
Adjusting the Aperture Value  
In Cand Dmodes, the range is from f/2 to 8 (wide-angle position) and from  
f/4 to 8 (telephoto zoom position).  
Larger aperture (Small f-number)  
f/2  
Smaller aperture (Large f-number)  
f/8  
C Aperture Value (F-number) and Zoom  
Large apertures (expressed by small f-numbers) let more light into the camera, and  
small apertures (large f-numbers) let less light.  
The aperture value of the zoom lens of this camera changes depending on the zoom  
position. When zooming to the wide-angle position and telephoto zoom position,  
the aperture values are f/2 and f/4, respectively.  
When Fixed aperture (A99) is set to On, zooming can be performed with  
minimum changes in the aperture value.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
50  
     
A(Programmed auto)  
Use for automatic control of the exposure by the  
camera.  
Different combinations of shutter speed and  
aperture value can be selected without  
changing the exposure by rotating the main  
command dial (“flexible program”). While  
flexible program is in effect, a flexible program  
1280  
1/125  
F5.6  
mark (A) is displayed next to the mode indicator (A) in the upper left of the  
monitor.  
To cancel flexible program, rotate the main command dial until the flexible  
program mark (A) is no longer displayed, or press the AE-L/AF-L button  
while pressing the w1 button. Selecting another shooting mode, or  
turning off the camera, also cancels flexible program.  
B(Shutter-priority auto)  
Use to shoot fast moving subjects at a fast shutter  
speed, or use to emphasize the movements of a  
moving subject at a slow shutter speed.  
The shutter speed can be adjusted by rotating  
the main command dial.  
1280  
1/125  
F5.6  
C(Aperture-priority auto)  
Use to bring subjects including both the  
foreground and background into focus or blur  
the subject's background intentionally.  
The aperture value can be adjusted by rotating  
the sub-command dial.  
1280  
1/250  
F5.6  
D(Manual)  
Use to control the exposure according to  
shooting requirements.  
When adjusting the aperture value or shutter  
speed, the degree of deviation from the  
exposure value measured by the camera is  
displayed in the exposure indicator of the  
monitor. The degree of deviation in the  
exposure indicator is displayed in EVs (–3 to  
+3 EV in increments of 1/3 EV).  
1280  
1/125  
F5.6  
Exposure indicator  
The shutter speed can be adjusted by rotating the main command dial and  
the aperture value can be adjusted by rotating the sub-command dial.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
51  
               
B Notes About Shooting  
When zooming is performed after the exposure is set, exposure combinations or  
aperture value may be changed.  
When the subject is too dark or too bright, it may not be possible to obtain the  
appropriate exposure. In such cases, the shutter speed indicator or aperture value  
indicator flashes when the shutter-release button is pressed halfway (except when  
the Dmode is used). Change the shutter speed setting or aperture value.  
B Notes About ISO Sensitivity  
When ISO sensitivity (A72) is set to Auto (default setting), ISO 80-200, ISO 80-  
400 or ISO 80-800, the ISO sensitivity in Dmode is fixed at ISO 80.  
C Built-in ND Filter  
When the subject is too bright, set Built-in ND filter in the shooting menu (A73)  
to reduce the light and shoot.  
Functions Available in A, B, C, DModes  
AF area mode (A58, 73)  
Flash mode (A59)  
Self-timer (A62)  
Focus mode (A64)  
Exposure compensation (A69)  
Quick menu (A70)  
Shooting menu (A73)  
Setup menu (A99)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
52  
The Control Range of the Shutter Speed  
The control range of the shutter speed differs depending on the aperture value  
or the ISO sensitivity setting. Additionally, the control range changes in the  
following continuous shooting settings.  
A, B, C, DModes  
Control range  
Setting  
A, B, Cmode  
Dmode  
2
Auto ,  
ISO 80-200 ,  
ISO 80-400 ,  
ISO 80-800  
2
2
2
3
1/4000 - 1 s  
3
ISO 80, 100  
ISO 125  
ISO 160  
ISO 200  
ISO 250  
ISO 320  
ISO 400  
ISO 500  
ISO 640  
ISO 800  
ISO 1000  
ISO 1250  
ISO 1600  
ISO 2000  
ISO 2500  
ISO 3200  
Hi 1  
1/4000 - 15 s  
3
1/4000 - 13 s  
3
1/4000 - 60 s  
3
1/4000 - 10 s  
3
1/4000 - 8 s  
3
1/4000 - 6 s  
3
1/4000 - 5 s  
3
1/4000 - 4 s  
ISO sensitivity  
1
3
1/4000 - 3 s  
3
3
1/4000 - 2.5 s  
1/4000 - 30 s  
3
1/4000 - 2 s  
3
1/4000 - 1.6 s  
3
3
1/4000 - 1.3 s  
1/4000 - 15 s  
3
1/4000 - 1 s  
3
1/4000 - 1/1.3 s  
3
3
1/4000 - 1/1.6 s  
1/4000 - 8 s  
3
1/4000 - 1/2 s  
3
3
1/4000 - 1/4 s  
1/4000 - 2 s  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
53  
   
Control range  
Setting  
Continuous H,  
A, B, Cmode  
Dmode  
3
3
Continuous M,  
1/4000 - 1/8 s  
1/4000 - 1/8 s  
Continuous L, BSS  
Multi-shot 16  
1/4000 - 1/30 s  
1/4000 - 1/125 s  
1/4000 - 1/30 s  
1/4000 - 1/125 s  
Continuous  
Continuous H: 120  
fps  
Continuous H: 60  
fps  
1/4000 - 1/60 s  
1/4000 - 1/60 s  
Intvl timer  
shooting  
3
3
1/4000 - 1 s  
1/4000 - 1 s  
1
The ISO sensitivity setting is restricted depending on the continuous shooting  
setting ( 78).  
In Dmode, the ISO sensitivity is fixed at ISO 80.  
The maximum shutter speed value varies depending on the aperture value. The  
shutter speed becomes slower when the aperture value is smaller. When the  
aperture value is set to f/2 (wide-angle position) or f/4 (telephoto zoom position),  
the shutter speed can be set to maximum 1/2000 second. When the aperture  
value is set to f/4.5 to f/8 (wide-angle position) or f/7.1 to f/8 (telephoto zoom  
position), the shutter speed can be set to maximum 1/4000 second.  
2
3
During Movie Custom Setting Mode  
Setting  
Control range  
1/8000 - 1/30 s  
1/4000 - 1/30 s  
CMode  
Shooting mode (A96)  
DMode  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
54  
E, Fand N(User Settings Modes)  
Setting combinations that are frequently used for shooting (User settings) can  
be saved in E, Fand N. Shooting is possible in A(Programmed auto), B  
(Shutter-priority auto), C(Aperture-priority auto) or D(Manual).  
Rotate the mode dial to E, For Nto retrieve  
the settings saved in Save user settings.  
Frame the subject and shoot with these  
settings, or change the settings as required.  
The setting combinations that are retrieved  
when the mode dial is rotated to E, For  
Ncan be changed as many times as you  
want in Save user settings.  
Saving Settings in E, For NMode (Save User  
Settings)  
The frequently used settings for shooting can be changed and saved in E,  
Fand N.  
1
2
Rotate the mode dial to E, For N.  
Change to a frequently used combination of shooting  
settings.  
Set the flash mode (A59) or focus mode (A64).  
Display the quick menu by pressing the nbutton (A70).  
Press the d button to display the menu and switch between tabs with the  
multi selector (A13).  
- E, F, Ntabs: Display the specialized menus for E, Fand N  
(A75).  
- A, B, C, Dtabs: Display the shooting menus (A73).  
3
After changing the settings, use  
the multi selector HI to select  
Save user settings in the  
specialized menu for E, For  
N, and press the k button.  
User settings  
Save user settings  
Reset user settings  
Shooting mode  
Focal length (35mm equiv.)  
Photo info  
Virtual horizon display  
Initial monitor display  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
55  
         
4
Select Yes and press the k  
button.  
Save user settings  
Save current settings?  
The current settings are saved.  
Move the zoom control toward g (i) to  
display the settings. Move toward g (i)  
again to return to the Save user settings  
screen.  
Yes  
No  
Info  
B The Clock Battery  
If the internal clock battery (A29) is exhausted, the settings saved in E, For N  
will be reset. Writing down any important setting is recommended.  
C Confirmation Screen of User Settings  
Move the zoom control toward g (i) in step 4 of Save user settings to display the  
settings on the screen.  
1
2
3
4
5 6  
1/250 F5.6  
7
8
12  
13  
9
10  
11  
14 15 16 17 18  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Shooting mode  
10 Zoom memory  
11 Focus mode, Focal length (35mm  
Shutter speed (Bor Dmode)  
Aperture value (Cor Dmode)  
Flash mode  
equiv.), Distortion control  
12 Photo info, Virtual horizon display  
13 Initial monitor display  
14 Image quality, Image size  
15 ISO sensitivity  
Flash exp. comp.  
Flash control  
AF area mode, Autofocus mode,  
AF assist  
16 White balance  
8
9
Metering, continuous shooting  
mode, Active D-Lighting  
17 Auto bracketing  
18 Picture Control  
Noise reduction filter  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
56  
Functions Available in E, Fand N Modes  
Flash mode (A59)  
Self-timer (A62)  
Focus mode (A64)  
Exposure compensation (A69)  
Quick menu (A70)  
Shooting menu (A73)  
Specialized menu for E, For N(A75)  
Setup menu (A99)  
C Resetting for E, Fand N  
If Reset user settings is selected in specialized menu for E, For N, the  
settings that are saved in the user settings are reset as follows:  
Specialized menus for E, Fand N(A75): Shooting mode: A  
Programmed auto, Focal length (35mm equiv.): 28 mm, Photo info:  
information hidden, Virtual horizon display: Circle, Initial monitor display:  
Show info, Flash mode: U Auto, Focus: A Autofocus, Self-timer: Off, AF  
assist: Auto  
Shooting menu, quick menu: Same as the default setting for each item.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
57  
   
Functions That Can Be Set Using the Multi  
Selector  
The functions that are available vary with the shooting mode, as shown below.  
1
2
4
3
.
A, B, C, D, e,  
E, F, N h  
Function  
A
y
u
3
1
2
m
Flash mode (A59)  
Self-timer (A62)  
Smile timer (A63)  
w
w
w
w
w
w
w
w
w
w
w
w
w
3
n
1
Remote control  
w
w
w
3
4
D
Focus mode (A64)  
w
2
3
G
AF area mode  
1
2
Set this function to release the shutter with the Remote Control ML-L3 (available  
separately) (E106).  
Set the method of how the camera selects the focus area for autofocus (A73).  
Set Multi selector right press to Off in the setup menu (A99) if you do not  
want to display the AF area mode setting when the multi sector K is pressed.  
Availability depends on the setting. See “Default Settings” (A67) for more  
information.  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
58  
               
Using the Flash  
You can shoot images with a flash by raising the built-in flash. You can set the  
flash mode to match the shooting conditions.  
1
Lower the K(flash pop-up)  
control to raise the flash.  
When the flash is lowered, flash operation  
is disabled and S is displayed.  
2
3
Press the multi selector H (m).  
Select the desired flash mode  
(A60) and press the k button.  
When the manual flash is selected, select  
the flash output and press the k button.  
If a setting is not applied by pressing the k  
button within a few seconds, the selection  
will be canceled.  
Auto  
B Flash Status Display  
The status of the flash can be confirmed with  
the flash mode icon at the top of the monitor  
by pressing the shutter-release button halfway.  
On: The flash fires in accordance with the  
flash mode when you press the shutter-  
release button all the way down. When U  
(auto) is set, the flash fires when W is displayed.  
Flashing: The flash is charging. The camera cannot shoot images.  
Off: The flash does not fire when an image is taken.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
59  
     
Available Flash Modes  
Auto  
U
The flash fires when necessary, such as in dim lighting.  
The flash mode icon on the shooting screen is displayed only  
immediately after the setting is made.  
Auto with red-eye reduction  
V
W
Reduce red-eye in portraits caused by the flash (A61).  
Off  
The flash does not fire.  
Available when an external flash unit (optional) is attached.  
We recommend using a tripod to stabilize the camera when shooting in  
dark surroundings.  
Fill flash  
X
The flash fires whenever an image is taken. Use to “fill-in” (illuminate)  
shadows and backlit subjects.  
Manual  
S
Fill flash fires at the flash output set for the built-in flash or an optional flash  
unit whose flash output can be set on the camera.  
Select the flash output from w (full flash), S1/2, S1/4, S1/8, S  
1/16, S1/32, S1/64 and S1/128 (only when an optional flash unit is  
used). For example, when S1/16 is selected, the flash output is 1/16 of  
the full flash.  
Slow sync  
Y
Suited to evening and night portraits that include background scenery. Fill  
flash fires to illuminate the main subject; slow shutter speeds are used to  
capture background at night or under dim lighting.  
Rear-curtain sync  
Z
Fill flash fires just before the shutter closes, creating the effect of a stream  
of light behind moving subjects.  
Commander mode  
z
The camera's built-in flash emits low-level flashes and an off-camera  
optional flash unit is controlled wirelessly as a remote flash (E60).  
The Speedlight fires according to the Commander mode options set in  
the shooting menu (A73).  
Not available when an optional flash unit is attached.  
Can be used when A, B, C, D, E, For Nmode is selected.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
60  
                   
B High Temperature Caution  
If you are taking images repeatedly with the flash within a short period of time, the  
flash unit and its surrounding area can become hot. Before lowering the flash, make  
sure to allow the flash unit and its surrounding area to cool down.  
C Lowering the Flash  
When not using the flash, gently push to lower the  
flash until it clicks shut.  
C The Flash Mode Setting  
The setting may not be available with some shooting modes.  
The setting applied in the following situations is saved in the camera’s memory  
even after the camera is turned off.  
- When shooting mode A, B, Cor Dis used  
- When V (auto with red-eye reduction) is selected in A (auto) mode  
C Red-eye Reduction  
If the camera detects red-eye while saving an image, the affected area is processed to  
reduce red-eye before the image is saved.  
Note the following when shooting:  
More time than usual is required to save images.  
Red-eye reduction may not produce the desired results in all situations.  
In some cases, red-eye reduction may be applied to areas of an image  
unnecessarily. In these cases, select another flash mode and take the image again.  
C External Flash Unit  
When an optional Speedlight or wireless Speedlight commander is attached to the  
accessory shoe (A1), the built-in flash is set to off. While the p icon (Speedlight  
indicator) is lit on the shooting screen, the Speedlight flash mode is displayed in the  
monitor.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
61  
     
Using the Self-timer  
The camera is equipped with a self-timer that releases the shutter about  
10 seconds, 2 seconds or 1 second after you press the shutter-release button. Set  
Vibration reduction to Off in the setup menu (  
stabilize the camera during shooting.  
A99) when using a tripod to  
1
Press the multi selector J (n).  
2
Select n10s (or n2s, n1s), and  
press the k button.  
To change the time for self-timer, press K  
before pressing the k button.  
n10s (10 seconds): Use on important  
occasions, such as weddings.  
n2s (2 seconds), n1s (1 second): Use to  
prevent camera shake.  
If a setting is not applied by pressing the k button within a few seconds, the  
selection will be canceled.  
When the shooting mode is Pet portrait scene mode, Y (pet portrait auto  
release) is displayed (A45). The self-timer cannot be used.  
Self-timer  
3
4
Frame the picture and press the shutter-release button  
halfway.  
Focus and exposure are set.  
Press the shutter-release  
button the rest of the way  
down.  
9
Countdown starts. The self-timer  
lamp flashes and then glows  
steadily about one second before  
the shutter is released (except  
when  
n1s is set).  
When the shutter is released, the  
self-timer is set to OFF.  
To stop the countdown, press  
the shutter-release button again.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
62  
     
Shooting Smiling Faces Automatically (Smile  
Timer)  
When the camera detects a smiling face, you can take an image automatically  
without pressing the shutter-release button.  
This function can be used when the shooting mode is A (auto), A, B, C, D,  
E, F, N, scene mode Portrait or Night portrait.  
1
Press the multi selector J (n).  
Change any flash mode, exposure, or  
shooting menu settings before pressing J.  
2
3
Select a (Smile timer), and press  
the k button.  
If a setting is not applied by pressing the k  
button within a few seconds, the selection  
will be canceled.  
Smile timer  
Frame the picture and wait for the  
subject to smile without pressing  
the shutter-release button.  
Point the camera at a human face.  
If the camera detects that the face framed  
by the double border is smiling, the shutter  
is automatically released.  
1280  
1/250  
F5.6  
Whenever the camera detects a smiling  
face, it automatically releases the shutter.  
4
End automatic shooting.  
To end automatic shooting with smile timer, return to step 1 and select OFF.  
B Notes About Smile Timer  
Under some shooting conditions, the camera may be unable to detect faces or  
detect smiles (A83). The shutter-release button can also be used for shooting.  
C When the Self-timer Lamp Flashes  
When using smile timer, the self-timer lamp flashes when the camera detects a face  
and flashes quickly immediately after the shutter is released.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
63  
     
Using Focus Mode  
Set the focus mode according to the distance to the subject.  
1
Press the multi selector I (p).  
2
Select the desired focus mode and  
press the k button.  
If a setting is not applied by pressing the k  
button within a few seconds, the selection  
will be canceled.  
Autofocus  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
64  
   
Available Focus Modes  
Autofocus  
A
The camera automatically adjusts the focus according to the distance to the  
subject. Use when the distance from the subject to the lens is 50 cm (1 ft 8  
in.) or more, or 80 cm (2 ft 8 in.) or more at the maximum telephoto zoom  
position.  
The focus mode icon on the shooting screen is displayed only  
immediately after the setting is made.  
Close range only/D Macro close-up  
C
Set when taking close-up images.  
When the zoom ratio is set to a position where Z/Fand the zoom  
indicator glow green, the camera can focus on subjects as close as  
approximately 10 cm (4 in.) from the lens. When the zoom is at the position  
where Gis displayed, the camera can focus on subjects as close as  
approximately 2 cm (0.8 in.) from the lens.  
When using the maximum telephoto zoom position, the camera can  
focus on subjects as close as approximately 45 cm (1 ft 6 in.) from the  
lens.  
When using C (close range only), the camera focuses on subjects in  
close range. The camera may not be able to focus on subjects at far  
distances.  
Infinity  
B
Use when shooting distant scenes through window glass or when shooting  
landscapes.  
The camera automatically adjusts the focus near infinity.  
The camera may not be able to focus on nearby objects.  
The flash mode is set to W (off).  
Manual focus  
E
The focus can be adjusted on any subject at a distance from approximately  
2 cm (0.8 in.) to infinity from the lens (A66). The closest distance at which  
the camera can focus varies depending on the zoom position.  
B Notes About Shooting with the Flash  
The flash may be unable to light the entire subject at distances of less than 50 cm  
(1 ft 8 in.).  
C Focus Mode Setting  
The setting may not be available with some shooting modes.  
For shooting modes A, B, Cand D, the setting is saved in the camera’s memory  
even after the camera is turned off.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
65  
         
Taking Images with Manual Focus  
Available when the shooting mode is A, B, C, D, E, F, N, special effects  
mode, Sports scene mode, movie mode or movie custom setting mode.  
1
Press the multi selector  
I (p), select E  
(manual focus), and  
then press the k  
button.  
Manual focus  
An enlarged view of the  
center area of the frame is  
displayed.  
2
Use the multi selector to adjust  
the focus while checking the  
enlarged view.  
Press H to move the focus farther away and  
press I to move it closer.  
The focus can be adjusted in higher detail by  
rotating the multi selector than pressing HI  
When K is pressed, first the camera focuses  
1/250  
F5.6  
1280  
.
with autofocus, and then the manual focus can be operated. When a  
confirmation dialog is displayed, select Yes and press the k button so that  
the camera focuses on the subject in the center of the frame with autofocus.  
Press the shutter-release button halfway to check the composition. Press the  
shutter-release button all the way to take the image.  
3
Press the k button.  
The set focus is locked.  
Press the shutter-release button all the way  
to take the image.  
To readjust the focus, press the k button to  
display the screen in step 2.  
1/250  
F5.6  
1280  
C E (Manual Focus)  
The digits displayed for the gauge on the right of the monitor in step 2 serve as a  
guideline for the distance to a subject that is in focus when the gauge indicates the  
center. To change the unit of this gauge, use MF distance indicator units in the  
setup menu (A99).  
The actual range at which the subject can be in focus varies depending on the  
aperture value and zoom position. To see whether the subject is in focus, check the  
image after shooting.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
66  
   
Default Settings  
The default settings for each shooting mode are described below.  
Focus  
AF area  
mode  
Flash mode Self-timer  
Shooting mode  
A (auto)  
mode  
(A64)  
2
(A59)  
(A62)  
1
U
OFF  
A
4
3
u (special effects)  
W
OFF  
OFF  
A
A
w
1
1
A, B, C, D  
U
U
y
y
E, F, N(User  
settings)  
OFF  
A
A
e (movie),  
h(movie custom  
setting)  
5
W
OFF  
Scene  
x (scene auto  
selector)  
6
5
5
U
V
OFF  
A
A
1
1
b (portrait)  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
5
5
c (landscape)  
d (sports)  
W
B
5
7
W
A
A
A
A
A
8
5
e (night portrait)  
f (party/indoor)  
Z (beach)  
V
V
9
5
10  
10  
U
U
z (snow)  
5
5
h (sunset)  
W
B
B
B
C
5
5
i (dusk/dawn)  
j (night landscape)  
k (close-up)  
u (food)  
W
5
5
5
5
W
W
5
W
p
5
10  
l (museum)  
m (fireworks show)  
W
A
5
5
W
B
n (black and white  
copy)  
10  
W
OFF  
A
11  
5
o (backlighting)  
p (panorama)  
O (pet portrait)  
X/W  
OFF  
OFF  
A
A
A
12  
10  
10  
W
5
13  
W
Y
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
67  
   
1
2
3
Smile timer can also be selected.  
E (manual focus) cannot be selected.  
The default setting is U (auto) when Creative monochrome or Cross process  
is selected.  
The flash is fixed at W (off) when Zoom exposure or Defocus during exposure  
is selected.  
s (subject tracking) and M (target finding AF) are not available.  
The AF area mode is fixed at Center (normal) when Zoom exposure is selected.  
The setting cannot be changed.  
4
5
6
The camera automatically selects the flash mode appropriate for the scene it  
has selected. The setting cannot be changed when using the built-in flash.  
A (autofocus) or E (manual focus) can be selected.  
The setting cannot be changed. The flash mode setting is fixed at fill flash with  
slow sync and red-eye reduction.  
7
8
9
May switch to slow sync with red-eye reduction flash mode.  
10 A (autofocus) or p (macro close-up) can be selected.  
11 When HDR is set to Off, the flash mode is fixed at X (fill flash). When HDR is  
set to other than Off, the flash mode is fixed at W (off).  
12 The setting cannot be changed when using Easy panorama.  
13 Pet portrait auto release (A45) can be set to on or off. Self-timer and remote  
control cannot be used.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
68  
Functions That Can Be Set Using the  
Exposure Compensation Dial  
Adjusting Brightness (Exposure Compensation)  
You can adjust overall image brightness.  
Select the compensation value by  
rotating the exposure compensation  
dial.  
To brighten the image, set a positive (+) value.  
To darken the image, set a negative (–) value.  
When set to a value other than “0“, the  
exposure compensation dial mark turns on  
when shooting.  
Exposure compensation  
dial mark  
C Exposure Compensation Value  
If the exposure compensation value is set to a  
value other than 0.0 when the shooting mode is  
D(manual) mode, the exposure is not  
compensated and the standard value of exposure  
indicator will change.  
1280  
1/250  
F5.6  
When the shooting mode is Fireworks show  
scene mode (A42), exposure compensation  
cannot be used.  
Exposure compensation  
value  
When the exposure compensation is set while using a flash, the compensation is  
applied to both the background exposure and to the flash output.  
C Exposure Compensation During Movie Recording  
The range of exposure compensation values that can be set is between –2 and +2.  
Once recording starts, the compensation value cannot be changed.  
If the exposure compensation value is set to a value other than 0.0 when Shooting  
mode (A96) of the movie custom setting is Manual, the exposure is not  
compensated and the standard value of the exposure indicator will not change  
either.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
69  
       
Functions That Can Be Set Using the n  
Button (Quick Menu: When Shooting Still  
Images)  
The functions that can be set vary depending on the shooting mode, as shown  
below.  
A, B, C, D,  
E, F, N  
Function  
A
y
u
a
b
c
d
I
Image quality/Image size  
ISO sensitivity  
w
w
w
w
w
w
w
w
w
White balance  
Auto bracketing  
My Menu  
a
Picture Control  
Basic Quick Menu Operations  
1
2
Press the nbutton.  
Image quality  
Image size  
1342  
Normal  
Use the multi selector HI to  
move to the tabs at the top of the  
screen.  
Tabs  
Image quality  
Image size  
You can also move to the tabs by rotating  
the sub-command dial.  
1342  
Normal  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
70  
                     
3
Use JK to select the tab for the  
function to be set.  
1
2
3
4 5 6  
You can also select a tab by rotating the  
main command dial.  
ISO sensitivity  
Minimum shutter speed  
Auto  
1 aImage quality/Image size  
*
Movie options will be shown when  
the mode dial is rotated to or  
e
h.  
2 bISO sensitivity  
3 cWhite balance  
4 dAuto bracketing  
5 IMy Menu  
6
a Picture Control  
4
5
Use HI to select an item and  
change the setting using JK.  
ISO sensitivity  
Minimum shutter speed  
You can also change the setting by rotating  
the main command dial.  
Auto  
Press the k button or nbutton when setting is complete.  
You can also press the shutter-release button to finish setting.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
71  
Available Quick Menu  
Option  
Description  
A
a
Image  
quality/Image  
size  
Allows you to set the image quality (compression ratio)  
and image size used when saving images.  
Default setting: Normal (image quality),  
F 4000×3000 (image size)  
Allows you to control the camera’s sensitivity to light.  
Default setting: Auto  
When Auto is selected, Eis displayed in the monitor  
b
ISO sensitivity  
while shooting if ISO sensitivity increases.  
In D(manual) mode, when set to Auto, ISO 80-200,  
ISO 80-400 or ISO 80-800, the ISO sensitivity is fixed  
at ISO 80.  
Allows you to adjust white balance to suit the weather  
conditions or light source in order to make the colors in  
images match what you see with your eyes.  
c
White balance  
Default setting: Auto (normal)  
Continuous shooting can be performed while changing  
the exposure (brightness) automatically with the shutter  
speed (Tv), aperture value (Av) or ISO sensitivity (Sv), or  
multiple images can be recorded while varying the  
white balance (WB).  
d
Auto  
bracketing  
Default setting: OFF  
Only the menu items that are frequently used for  
shooting can be displayed.  
I
My Menu  
Options that are displayed in My Menu can be  
changed from Customize My Menu in the setup  
menu (A99).  
a
Picture  
Control  
(COOLPIX  
Picture  
Control)  
Allows you to change the settings for image recording  
according to the shooting scene or your preferences.  
Default setting: Standard  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
72  
                                     
Functions That Can Be Set with the d  
Button (Shooting Menu, Specialized Menu  
for E, For N)  
Shooting Menu  
In the following shooting modes, the settings of the shooting menu can be  
changed by pressing the d button (A12).  
A, B, Cand Dmodes  
Special effects mode (Only AF area mode can be set.)  
E, Fand Nmodes (The settings can be changed in the second tab.)  
A, B, C, D  
modes  
E, F, N  
modes  
Shooting menu  
Shooting menu  
Custom Pict  
Metering  
Continuous  
AF area mod  
Autofocus m  
Flash exp. c  
Noise reduc  
Custom Pictu  
Metering  
Continuous  
AF area mod  
Autofocus m  
Flash exp. co  
Noise reduc  
Option  
Description  
A
Custom Picture  
Control  
(COOLPIX Custom  
Picture Control)  
Allows you to customize the settings of COOLPIX  
Picture Control (A72) and register them in  
Custom 1 or Custom 2 of Picture Control in  
the quick menu.  
Allows you to set the method that the camera  
uses to measure the brightness of the subject.  
Metering  
Default setting: Matrix  
Allows you to select single or continuous  
shooting.  
Continuous  
Default setting: Single  
Allows you to change the method of how the  
camera selects the focus area for autofocus.  
AF area mode  
Default setting:  
- A, B, Cor Dmode: Center (normal)  
-
u mode: Auto  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
73  
                       
Option  
Description  
A
Allows you to select either Single AF, which  
focuses only when the shutter-release button is  
pressed halfway, or Full-time AF, which  
continues focusing even when the shutter-  
release button is not pressed halfway.  
Autofocus mode  
Default setting: Single AF  
Allows you to adjust the flash output.  
Default setting: 0.0  
Flash exp. comp.  
Allows you to set the strength of the noise  
reduction function that is normally performed  
when saving images.  
Noise reduction filter  
Default setting: Normal  
Allows you to select On or Off for the built-in ND  
Built-in ND filter  
Distortion control  
Active D-Lighting  
Zoom memory  
filter.  
Default setting: Off  
Allows you to select whether to correct the  
peripheral distortion that occurs due to the  
intrinsic characteristics of lenses. Enabling  
distortion control reduces the size of the frame,  
as compared to when distortion control is not  
enabled.  
Default setting: Off  
Allows you to prevent loss of contrast details in  
highlights and shadows when shooting images.  
Default setting: Off  
When the zoom control is moved while pressing  
the w1 button, the zoom position (equivalent  
to focal length/angle of view in 35mm [135]  
format) is switched to the positions that have  
been selected by setting the check box to on in  
this menu option.  
Default setting: On w for all the check boxes  
Allows you to set the zoom position (equivalent  
to focal length/angle of view in 35mm [135]  
format) for when the camera is turned on.  
Startup zoom  
position  
Default setting: 28 mm  
When On is selected, the exposure setting  
resulting from the shutter speed and aperture  
value set in D(manual) mode is reflected in the  
brightness on the shooting screen.  
M exposure preview  
Default setting: Off  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
74  
                       
Option  
Description  
A
If Metering (A73) is set to Matrix or Spot and  
AF area mode (A73) is set to Manual, the  
brightness of the subject is measured by giving  
higher priority to the focus area.  
Focus-coupled  
metering  
Default setting: On  
Allows you to set how the wirelessly-controlled  
optional flash unit fires when the flash mode  
(A59) is set to z (commander mode).  
Commander mode  
Default setting:  
-
Flash mode: Standard flash  
-
Flash control mode: TTL  
Specialized Menu for E, For N  
In E, Fand Nshooting modes, the settings of the following menu  
options can be changed in the top tab (A12).  
.
User settings  
Save user settings  
Reset user settings  
Shooting mode  
Focal length (35mm equiv.)  
Photo info  
Virtual horizon display  
Initial monitor display  
Description  
Save user settings Allows you to save the current settings.  
A
Option  
Reset user  
settings  
Allows you to reset the settings saved in E, For  
N.  
Allows you to select the standard shooting mode.  
Default setting: AProgrammed auto  
Shooting mode  
The current flexible program (when set to A),  
shutter speed (when set to Bor D) or aperture  
value (when set to Cor D) settings are also saved.  
Allows you to set the zoom position for when the  
mode dial is set.  
Focal length  
(35mm equiv.)  
Default setting: 28 mm  
Allows you to set whether or not the virtual horizon,  
histogram and framing grid are displayed in the  
monitor. This setting is not applied to the setup  
menu settings.  
Photo info  
Default setting: No check marks  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
75  
               
Description  
A
Option  
Allows you to set the virtual horizon display. This  
setting is not applied to the setup menu settings.  
Virtual horizon  
display  
Default setting: Circle  
Allows you to set the information displayed in the  
monitor.  
Initial monitor  
display  
Default setting: Show info  
Allows you to set the flash mode.  
Default setting: Auto  
Allows you to set the focus mode.  
Default setting: Autofocus  
Flash mode  
Focus  
Allows you to set the self-timer.  
Default setting: Off  
Self-timer  
Allows you to enable or disable the AF-assist  
illuminator. This setting is not applied to the setup  
menu settings.  
AF assist  
Default setting: Auto  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
76  
       
Functions That Cannot Be Used  
Simultaneously  
Some functions cannot be used with other menu settings.  
Restricted  
function  
Setting  
Description  
Focus mode  
When B (infinity) is selected, the flash is not  
available.  
When RAW (NRW) images are recorded, red-  
eye reduction processing is not performed  
even if V (auto with red-eye reduction) is  
set (including JPEG images when both RAW  
(NRW) and JPEG images were recorded at the  
same time).  
Image quality  
Flash mode  
Continuous  
The flash is not available.  
Auto  
The flash is not available.  
bracketing  
Self-timer/  
Smile timer/  
Remote control  
When Subject tracking is selected, the self-  
timer/smile timer/remote control are not  
available.  
AF area mode  
AF area mode  
When Subject tracking is selected, E  
(manual focus) is not available.  
Focus mode  
When BSS, Multi-shot 16, Continuous H:  
120 fps or Continuous H: 60 fps is selected,  
RAW (NRW), RAW (NRW) + Fine and RAW  
(NRW) + Normal are not available.  
Continuous  
Image quality  
Auto  
bracketing  
When White balance bracketing is  
selected, RAW (NRW), RAW (NRW) + Fine  
and RAW (NRW) + Normal are not available.  
When Image quality is set to RAW (NRW),  
Image size is fixed at F 4000×3000.  
When RAW (NRW) + Fine or RAW (NRW)  
+ Normal is selected, Image size of the  
JPEG image can be set. Note, however, that  
I 3984×2656, u 3968×2232 and H  
3000×3000 cannot be selected.  
Image quality  
Image size  
When Continuous H: 120 fps or  
Continuous H: 60 fps is selected, Image  
size is fixed at A (1280 × 960 pixels).  
When Multi-shot 16 is selected, Image  
size is fixed at D (2560 × 1920 pixels).  
Continuous  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
77  
     
Restricted  
function  
Setting  
Description  
When Multi-shot 16, Continuous H: 120  
fps or Continuous H: 60 fps is selected, ISO  
sensitivity is fixed at Auto.  
Continuous  
When ISO sensitivity is set to Auto and  
Active D-Lighting is set to any mode  
other than Off, the maximum value for ISO  
sensitivity is set to ISO 800.  
When Active D-Lighting is set to any  
mode other than Off, 1600, 2000, 2500,  
3200 and Hi 1 in ISO sensitivity are not  
available.  
Active D-  
Lighting  
ISO sensitivity  
If ISO sensitivity is set to Auto when  
Shooting mode is Manual, ISO sensitivity  
is fixed at ISO 80.  
When Shooting mode is Special effects,  
ISO sensitivity is switched to Auto.  
Shooting  
mode of Movie  
custom setting  
Picture Control When Monochrome is selected, White  
White balance  
Picture Control  
balance is fixed at Auto (normal).  
Active D-  
Lighting  
When using Active D-Lighting, Contrast in  
manual adjustment cannot be adjusted.  
Shooting  
When Shooting mode is Special effects,  
Picture Control is not available.  
mode of Movie  
custom setting  
Active D-  
Lighting  
When Active D-Lighting is set to any mode  
other than Off, Metering is reset to Matrix.  
Metering  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
78  
 
Restricted  
function  
Setting  
Description  
Continuous  
(A73)/Auto  
bracketing  
Continuous and Auto bracketing are not  
available simultaneously.  
Self-timer  
(A62)/  
Remotecontrol  
When self-timer or the Remote Control ML-L3  
is used, a single image is shot even if  
Continuous H, Continuous M, Continuous  
L, or BSS has been set.  
Continuous/  
Auto  
bracketing  
When the camera detects smiling faces and  
the shutter is released, only one image is shot.  
If Intvl timer shooting is set, shooting  
Smile timer  
finishes automatically after one image is shot.  
When Image quality is set to RAW (NRW),  
RAW (NRW) + Fine or RAW (NRW) +  
Normal, BSS, Multi-shot 16, Continuous H:  
120 fps, Continuous H: 60 fps and White  
balance bracketing are not available.  
Image quality  
Picture Control When Monochrome is selected, White  
balance bracketing is not available.  
The camera captures images using face  
detection regardless of the applied AF area  
mode option.  
Smile timer  
When set to E (manual focus), the AF area  
mode cannot be set.  
Focus mode  
When Target finding AF is selected and  
Picture Control is set to Monochrome, AF  
area mode operates using the Auto setting.  
Picture Control  
AF area mode  
When Target finding AF is selected, and if  
the white balance is set to Preset manual,  
Incandescent, Fluorescent FL3 or Choose  
color temp., or fine adjustment of white  
balance is performed, the camera focuses on a  
face or selects one or more of the 9 focus  
areas containing the subject closest to the  
camera.  
White balance  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
79  
Restricted  
function  
Setting  
Description  
Smile timer  
Autofocus mode option cannot be changed  
when the smile timer is selected.  
When the focus mode is set to B (infinity), the  
autofocus mode operates using the Single  
AF setting.  
Focus mode  
Autofocus  
mode  
When AF area mode is set to Face priority,  
Subject tracking or Target finding AF,  
Single AF is automatically selected.  
AF area mode  
When Shooting mode is set to Special  
effects, the built-in ND filter is automatically  
controlled.  
Shooting  
Built-in ND  
filter  
mode of Movie  
custom setting  
When ISO sensitivity is set to 1600, 2000,  
2500, 3200 or Hi 1, Active D-Lighting is not  
available.  
ISO sensitivity  
Active D-  
Lighting  
Smile timer  
The virtual horizon is not displayed when the  
smile timer is selected.  
The virtual horizon is not displayed when  
Face priority is selected.  
The virtual horizon is not displayed when  
Subject tracking is selected. After the  
subject has been registered (during subject  
tracking), the histogram is not displayed.  
The virtual horizon and histogram are not  
displayed when Target finding AF is  
selected.  
Photo info  
AF area mode  
When Image quality is set to RAW (NRW),  
RAW (NRW) + Fine or RAW (NRW) +  
Normal, date cannot be imprinted on images.  
Image quality  
Print date  
When Continuous H: 120 fps or  
Continuous H: 60 fps is selected, date  
cannot be imprinted on images.  
Continuous  
When Continuous H, Continuous M,  
Continuous L, Continuous H: 120 fps,  
Continuous H: 60 fps, BSS, or Multi-shot  
16 is selected, shutter sound is disabled.  
Continuous  
Sound settings  
Auto  
bracketing  
When AE Bracketing (Tv), AE Bracketing  
(Av) or AE Bracketing (Sv) is selected,  
shutter sound is disabled.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
80  
 
Restricted  
function  
Setting  
Description  
Smile timer  
When the smile timer is selected, digital zoom  
is not available.  
Focus mode  
When E (manual focus) is selected, digital  
zoom is not available.  
When Image quality is set to RAW (NRW),  
RAW (NRW) + Fine or RAW (NRW) +  
Normal, digital zoom is not available.  
Image quality  
Digital zoom  
Continuous  
When Multi-shot 16 is selected, digital zoom  
is not available.  
AF area mode  
When Subject tracking is selected, digital  
zoom is not available.  
Zoom memory When the w1 button is held down, digital  
zoom is not available.  
B Notes About Digital Zoom  
Depending on the shooting mode or the current settings, digital zoom may not be  
available (E81).  
When digital zoom is in effect, selectable options for AF area mode or metering  
mode are restricted.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
81  
Focusing  
The focus area varies depending on the shooting mode.  
Focusing in A (Auto) Mode or uMode  
The camera automatically selects one or  
more of the 9 focus areas containing the  
subject closest to the camera when the  
shutter-release button is pressed halfway.  
When the subject is in focus, the focus areas  
that are in focus glow green.  
1/250  
F5.6  
In special effects mode, the method of how  
the camera selects the focus area for  
autofocus can be changed by selecting AF  
area mode (A73) in the shooting menu.  
Focus areas  
Using the Target Finding AF  
When AF area mode (default setting: Center (normal)) in A, B, C, D, E,  
For Nmode is set to Target finding AF, the camera operates in the  
manner described below when you press the shutter-release button halfway.  
The camera detects the main subject and  
focuses on it. When the subject is in focus,  
the focus area glows green.  
If a human face is detected, the camera  
automatically sets focus priority on it.  
If no main subject is detected, the camera  
operates in the same manner as in A (auto)  
mode.  
1/250  
F5.6  
Focus areas  
B Notes About Target Finding AF  
Depending on shooting conditions, the subject that the camera determines to be  
the main subject may vary.  
The main subject may not be detected when using certain White balance or  
Picture Control settings.  
The camera may not detect the main subject appropriately in the following  
situations:  
- When the subject is very dark or bright  
- When the main subject lacks clearly defined colors  
- When the shot is framed so that the main subject is on the edge of the monitor  
- When the main subject is composed of a repeating pattern  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
82  
         
Using Face Detection  
In the following settings, the camera uses face  
detection to automatically focus on human  
faces.  
Scene auto selector, Portrait, or Night  
portrait scene mode (A39)  
a (Smile timer) (A63)  
When AF area mode (A73) is set to Face  
1280  
1/250  
F5.6  
priority  
If the camera detects more than one face, a  
double border is displayed around the face that the camera focuses on, and  
single borders are displayed around the other faces.  
If the shutter-release button is pressed halfway when no faces are detected:  
When Scene auto selector is selected, the focus area changes depending  
on the scene.  
In Portrait and Night portrait scene modes, the camera focuses on the  
area in the center of the frame.  
When a (smile timer) is selected, the camera focuses on the subject in the  
center of the frame.  
When AF area mode is set to Face priority, the camera selects the focus  
area containing the subject closest to the camera.  
B Notes About Face Detection  
The camera’s ability to detect faces depends on a variety of factors, including the  
direction in which the faces are looking.  
The camera may be unable to detect faces in the following situations:  
- When faces are partially hidden by sunglasses or otherwise obstructed  
- When faces take up too much or too little of the frame  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
83  
   
Using Skin Softening  
When the shutter is released while using one of the shooting modes listed  
below, the camera detects human faces and processes the image to soften  
facial skin tones (up to 3 faces).  
Scene auto selector, Portrait or Night portrait in scene mode (A39)  
Skin softening can also be applied to saved images (A88).  
B Notes About Skin Softening  
It may take more time than usual to save images after shooting.  
Under some shooting conditions, the desired skin softening results may not be  
achieved, and skin softening may be applied to areas of the image where there are  
no faces.  
Subjects Not Suitable for Autofocus  
The camera may not focus as expected in the following situations. In some rare  
cases, the subject may not be in focus despite the fact that the focus area or  
focus indicator glows green:  
Subject is very dark  
Objects of sharply differing brightness are included in the scene (e.g. the sun  
behind the subject makes that subject appear very dark)  
No contrast between the subject and surroundings (e.g. a portrait subject  
wearing a white shirt is standing in front of a white wall)  
Several objects are at different distances from the camera (e.g. the subject is  
inside a cage)  
Subjects with repeating patterns (window blinds, buildings with multiple  
rows of similarly shaped windows, etc.)  
Subject is moving rapidly  
In the situations noted above, try pressing the shutter-release button halfway  
to refocus several times, or focus on another subject positioned at the same  
distance from the camera as the actual desired subject, and use focus lock  
The camera can also focus using manual focus (A64, 66).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
84  
       
Focus Lock  
Focus lock shooting is recommended when the camera does not activate the  
focus area that contains the desired subject.  
1
2
Set AF area mode to Center (normal) (A73).  
AF area mode can be set when the shooting mode is A, B, C, D, E, F,  
N, or special effects.  
Position the subject in the  
center of the frame and  
press the shutter-release  
button halfway.  
Confirm that the focus area glows  
green.  
1280  
1/250  
F5.6  
Focus and exposure are locked.  
3
4
Without lifting your finger,  
recompose the picture.  
Make sure to maintain the same distance  
between the camera and the subject.  
1/250  
F5.6  
Press the shutter-release button the rest of  
the way down to take the picture.  
C Using the AE-L/AF-L Button for Focus Lock  
You can lock the exposure and focus while holding down the AE-L/AF-L button  
(A100) instead of pressing the shutter-release button halfway.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
85  
     
Playback Features  
Playback Zoom  
Moving the zoom control toward  
g(i) in full-frame  
playback mode (  
A36) zooms in on the image.  
g
(i)  
15/11/2013 15:30  
0004.JPG  
Displayed area  
guide  
f
(h)  
4/ 132  
Image is displayed  
full-frame.  
Image is zoomed in.  
You can change the zoom ratio by moving the zoom control toward f(h) or g  
(i). The zoom can also be adjusted by rotating the command dial.  
To view a different area of the image, press the multi selector HIJK.  
If you are viewing an image that was captured using face detection or pet  
detection, the camera zooms in on the face detected at the time of shooting  
(except images captured using Continuous, AE Bracketing (Tv), AE Bracketing  
(Av) or AE Bracketing (Sv)). To zoom in on an area of the image where there are  
no faces, adjust the zoom ratio and then press HIJK.  
When a zoomed image is displayed, press the kbutton to return to full-frame  
playback mode.  
C Cropping Images  
When a zoomed image is displayed, you can press the dbutton to crop the image  
to include only the visible portion and save it as a separate file (E17).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
86  
             
Thumbnail Display, Calendar Display  
Moving the zoom control toward  
f
(h  
) in full-  
frame playback mode (A36) displays images as  
thumbnails.  
f
(h)  
f
(h)  
15/11/2013 15:30  
0004.JPG  
1/ 132  
2013 11  
1
8
2
9
3
4
5
6
7
10 11 12 13 14 15 16  
17 18 19 20 21 22 23  
24 25 26 27 28 29 30  
3
g
g
1/ 132  
(i)  
(i)  
Calendar Display  
Full-frame Display  
Thumbnail Display  
You can change the number of thumbnails displayed by moving the zoom  
control toward f or g(i).  
While using thumbnail playback mode, use the multi selector HIJKor  
rotate it to select an image, and then press the kbutton to display that  
image full-frame.  
(
h)  
While using calendar display mode, use the multi selector HIJKor  
rotate it to select a date, and then press the kbutton to display the images  
captured on that day.  
An image or date can also be selected by rotating the command dial.  
B Calendar Display  
Images captured when the camera’s date is not set are treated as images captured  
on January 1, 2013.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
87  
       
Functions That Can Be Set with the d  
Button (Playback Menu)  
When viewing images in full-frame playback mode or thumbnail playback  
mode, you can configure the playback menu settings listed below by pressing  
the dbutton (A12).  
Playback menu  
Quick retouch  
D-Lighting  
15/11/2013 15:30  
0004.JPG  
Skin softening  
Filter effects  
Print order  
Slide show  
Delete  
4
132  
Option  
k Quick  
retouch  
Description  
A
Allows you to create retouched copies in which  
contrast and saturation have been enhanced.  
1
Allows you to create copies with enhanced  
brightness and contrast, brightening dark portions  
of an image.  
1
I D-Lighting  
e Skin  
softening  
Detects faces in images and creates a copy with  
softer facial skin tones.  
1
Allows you to apply a variety of effects using digital  
filter. The available effects are Soft, Selective color,  
Cross screen, Fisheye, Miniature effect,  
Painting and Vignette.  
1
p Filter effects  
Allows you to select which images are printed, and  
how many copies of each image are printed, prior to E62  
2
a Print order  
printing.  
Allows you to view images in an automatic slide  
show.  
b Slide show  
2
c Delete  
Deletes an image. Multiple images can be deleted.  
Protects selected images and movies from  
accidental deletion.  
2
d Protect  
Allows you to rotate the displayed image to portrait  
or landscape orientation.  
2
1
f Rotate image  
g Small picture  
E Voice memo  
Creates a small copy of images.  
Allows you to use the camera’s microphone to  
record voice memos and attach them to images.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
88  
                         
Option  
2
Description  
A
Allows you to copy images between the internal  
memory and a memory card. This function can also E68  
h Copy  
be used to copy movies.  
1
Creates a new image surrounded by a black border.  
Compensates for the slanting of images taken.  
j Black border  
1
R Straighten  
Creates JPEG-format copies by performing RAW  
processing within the camera for RAW (NRW) images  
without having to use a computer.  
F RAW (NRW)  
processing  
1, 2  
Allows you to select whether to display only the key  
picture for a sequence of images captured  
continuously or to display the sequence as  
individual images.  
C Sequence  
display options  
When only the key picture is displayed for a  
sequence, press the kbutton to display each  
image in the sequence. Press the multi selector  
Hto return to the key picture display.  
x Choose key  
picture  
Allows you to change the key picture for images  
captured in sequence.  
2
1
2
Edited images are saved as separate files. Some images may not be edited.  
Select an image on the image selection screen. See “Using the Screen for Selecting  
Images“ (A90) for more information.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
89  
           
Using the Screen for Selecting Images  
When an image selection screen such as the one  
Erase selected images  
shown on the right is displayed while operating  
the camera, follow the procedures described  
below to select the images.  
ON/OFF  
Back  
1
Use the multi selector JKor rotate  
it to select the desired image.  
Erase selected images  
Move the zoom control (A1) toward g(i)  
to switch to full-frame playback, or f(h) to  
switch to thumbnail playback.  
Only one image can be selected for Rotate  
image, Choose key picture, and Welcome  
screen. Proceed to step 3.  
ON/OFF  
Back  
2
3
Use HIto select ON or OFF (or  
Erase selected images  
the number of copies).  
When ON is selected, a check mark (y) is  
displayed with the image. Repeat steps 1  
and 2 to select additional images.  
ON/OFF  
Back  
Press the kbutton to apply the image selection.  
With selections such as Selected images, a confirmation dialog is displayed.  
Follow the instructions displayed in the monitor.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
90  
   
Recording and Playing Back  
Movies  
Recording Movies  
Movies can be recorded using the following two modes.  
You can perform basic movie recording. When Movie  
e(movie) mode  
options is set to HS movies, you can record slow motion  
movies and fast motion movies (E31).  
h(movie custom You can set the Shooting mode and ISO sensitivity  
setting) mode and enjoy recording more authentic movies.  
1
Rotate the mode dial to  
e(or h).  
Movie recording time remaining  
Check the remaining  
amount of movie recording  
time.  
When Shooting mode  
(A96) of the movie custom  
setting mode is set to  
Aperture-priority auto or  
Manual, set the aperture  
value or shutter speed  
25m30s  
before recording a movie (A49). The aperture value and shutter speed  
cannot be set during movie recording.  
2
3
Press the shutter-  
release button all the  
way to start recording.  
The camera focuses on the  
area in the center of the  
frame.  
7m23s  
Recording“ (A93) for more  
information.  
Press the shutter-release button all the way to end  
recording.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
91  
           
B Maximum Movie Length  
Individual movie files cannot exceed 4 GB in size or 29 minutes in length, even when  
there is sufficient free space on the memory card for longer recording.  
The maximum movie length for a single movie is displayed on the shooting screen.  
Recording may end before either limit is reached if camera temperature becomes  
elevated.  
The actual movie length may vary depending on the movie content, subject  
movement, or type of memory card.  
B Notes About Saving Images and Recording Movies  
The indicator showing the number of exposures remaining or the indicator showing  
the maximum movie length flashes while images are being saved or while a movie is  
being recorded. Do not open the battery-chamber/memory card slot cover or  
remove the battery or memory card while an indicator is flashing. Doing this could  
result in loss of data, or in damage to the camera or the memory card.  
B Notes About Movie Recording  
Memory cards with an SD Speed Class rating of 6 or faster are recommended when  
recording movies (A25). Movie recording may stop unexpectedly when a  
memory card with a lower Speed Class rating is used.  
The sounds of zoom control operation, zoom, autofocus lens drive movement, vibration  
reduction, and aperture operation when brightness changes may be recorded.  
The following phenomena may be seen in the monitor while recording movies.  
These phenomena are saved in the recorded movies.  
- Banding may occur in images under fluorescent, mercury-vapor, or sodium-vapor  
lighting.  
- Subjects that move quickly from one side of the frame to the other, such as a  
moving train or car, may appear skewed.  
- The entire movie image may be skewed when the camera is panned.  
- Lighting or other bright areas may leave residual images when the camera is  
moved.  
Depending on the distance to the subject or the amount of zoom applied, subjects  
with repeating patterns (fabrics, lattice windows, etc.) may have colored stripes  
(interference patterns, moire, etc.) in them during movie recording and playback.  
This occurs when the pattern in the subject and the layout of the image sensor  
interfere with each other; it is not a malfunction.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
92  
 
B Notes About Using Zoom During Movie Recording  
The zoom indicator is not displayed during movie recording.  
There may be some degradation in image quality when digital zoom is used. When  
recording movies, digital zoom operates up to approximately 2× the maximum  
optical zoom ratio. If you zoom in on the subject while recording a movie, the  
zoom motion temporarily stops at the position where optical zoom is changed to  
digital zoom.  
When Shooting mode (A96) of the movie custom setting mode is set to  
Aperture-priority auto or Manual, optical zoom cannot be used during movie  
recording.  
B Camera Temperature  
The camera may become warm when recording movies for an extended period of  
time or when the camera is used in a hot area.  
If the inside of the camera becomes extremely hot when recording movies, the  
camera will automatically stop recording. The amount of time remaining until the  
camera stops recording (B10s) is displayed. After the camera stops recording, it  
turns itself off.  
Leave the camera off until the inside of the camera has cooled.  
Focusing During Movie Recording  
The focus can be adjusted during movie recording in the following manner  
in accordance with the Autofocus mode (A96) setting of the movie  
menu.  
- A Single AF (default setting): The focus is locked when movie  
recording starts. To perform the autofocus function during movie  
recording, press the AE-L/AF-L button (A2).  
- B Full-time AF: The focus is adjusted repeatedly even during movie  
recording. To lock the exposure or focus during movie recording, press the  
AE-L/AF-L button. To cancel the lock, press the AE-L/AF-L button again.  
When the focus mode (A64) is E (manual focus), adjust the focus  
manually. The focus can be adjusted by using the multi selector H(far)I  
(near) while recording movies.  
Autofocus may not perform as expected (A84). Should this occur, try E  
(manual focus) (A64, 66) or set Autofocus mode in the movie menu to  
A Single AF (default setting) and then use focus lock (A85) to record.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
93  
   
Functions Available in Movie Mode and Movie Custom  
Setting Mode  
Self-timer (A62)  
Focus mode (A64)  
Exposure compensation (A69)  
Quick menu (A70)  
Movie menu (A96)  
Setup menu (A99)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
94  
Functions That Can Be Set Using the nButton  
(Quick Menu: When Recording Movies)  
Available functions differ according to the movie mode.  
See “Basic Quick Menu Operations” (A70) for how to set the quick menu  
options.  
Function  
Movie options  
e
w
h
w
w
w
a
b
c
d
I
ISO sensitivity  
White balance  
Auto bracketing  
My Menu  
w
a
Picture Control  
w
Option  
Description  
Allows you to select the movie type.  
A
Select normal speed to record movies at normal speed,  
or HS (high speed) to record movies that play in slow or  
fast motion.  
a
Movie options Only normal speed movies can be selected in h  
(movie custom setting) mode.  
Default setting: d 1080P/30p or o 1080P/  
25p  
Allows you to control the camera’s sensitivity to light.  
Default setting: Auto  
b
ISO sensitivity  
If ISO sensitivity is set to Auto when Shooting  
mode of the movie custom setting menu (A96) is  
Manual, ISO sensitivity is fixed at ISO 80.  
Allows you to adjust white balance to suit the weather  
conditions or light source in order to make the colors in  
c
White balance images match what you see with your eyes.  
Default setting: Auto (normal)  
a
Allows you to change the settings for image recording  
according to the shooting scene or your preferences.  
Picture  
Control  
(COOLPIX  
Picture  
Control)  
Can be set when Shooting mode (A96) of the  
movie custom setting menu is set to Aperture-  
priority auto or Manual.  
Default setting: Standard  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
95  
                     
Functions That Can Be Set with the  
d
Button  
(Movie and Movie Custom Setting Menus)  
In movie mode or movie custom setting mode, press the dbutton to set the  
following menu options (A12).  
Movie custom  
setting menu  
Movie menu  
Movie  
Movie custom s  
Autofocus m  
Wind noise  
Shooting m  
Custom Pict  
Autofocus m  
Built-in ND fi  
Wind noise  
Available functions differ according to the movie mode.  
h
Function  
e(movie)  
(movie custom setting)  
Shooting mode  
w
w
w
w
w
Custom Picture Control  
Autofocus mode  
w
Built-in ND filter  
Wind noise reduction  
w
Option  
Description  
Allows you to set the standard shooting mode.  
A
Default setting: Aperture-priority auto  
When Special effects is selected, also allows you E70  
to select a shooting effect (A46) (default setting:  
Painting).  
Shooting mode  
Custom Picture  
Allows you to customize the settings of COOLPIX  
Control (COOLPIX Picture Control (A95) and register them in Custom  
Custom Picture  
Control)  
1 or Custom 2 of Picture Control in the quick  
menu.  
Allows you to select either Single AF, which locks  
focus when movie recording begins, or Full-time  
Autofocus mode AF, which continues focusing during movie  
recording.  
Default setting: Single AF  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
96  
                   
Option  
Description  
A
Allows you to select On or Off for the built-in ND  
filter.  
Default setting: Off  
Built-in ND filter  
When Shooting mode of the movie custom  
setting menu is set to Special effects, the built-in  
ND filter is automatically controlled.  
Allows you to set whether or not to reduce wind  
noise during movie recording.  
Wind noise  
reduction  
Default setting: Off  
Playing Back Movies  
Press the cbutton to enter playback mode.  
Movies are indicated by the movie options icon  
15/11/2013 15::300  
0004.MOV  
Press the kbutton to play back movies.  
22m16s  
To adjust the volume, move the zoom control  
(A1).  
7m42s  
Volume indicator  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
97  
         
Functions Available During  
Playback  
Paused  
Rotate the multi selector or the main command  
dial to fast forward or rewind.  
Playback controls are displayed at the top of the  
monitor.  
The operations listed below can be performed  
by using the multi selector JKor sub-  
command dial to select a control and then  
pressing the kbutton.  
7m42s  
Function  
Rewind  
Icon  
Description  
A
Hold down the kbutton to rewind the movie.  
Advance  
Pause  
End  
B
E
G
Hold down the kbutton to advance the movie.  
Pause playback. The operations listed below can be  
performed while paused.  
Rewind the movie one frame.  
Hold down the kbutton for continuous rewinding.*  
C
Advance the movie one frame.  
D
F
I
Hold down the kbutton for continuous advancing.*  
Resume playback.  
Extract the desired portion of a movie and save it as a  
separate file.  
Extract a single frame of a movie and save it as a still  
image.  
H
Return to full-frame playback mode.  
*
The movie can also be advanced or rewound by one frame by rotating the multi  
selector or main command dial.  
Deleting Movies  
To delete a movie, select the desired movie in full-frame playback mode  
(A36) or thumbnail playback mode (A87) and press the lbutton (A37).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
98  
   
General Camera Setup  
Functions That Can Be Set with the d  
Button (Setup Menu)  
Press the dbutton Mz (setup) tab (A13)  
The settings of the menu options listed below  
can be configured.  
Set up  
Welcome screen  
Time zone and date  
Monitor settings  
Print date  
Self-timer: after release  
Vibration reduction  
AF assist  
Option  
Description  
A
Allows you to select whether or not the welcome  
screen is displayed when the camera is turned on.  
Welcome screen  
Time zone and date Allows you to set the camera clock.  
Allows you to adjust post-shooting image review,  
Monitor settings  
monitor brightness, and photo information display  
settings.  
Allows you to imprint the shooting date and time  
on images.  
Print date  
Self-timer: after  
release  
Allows you to select whether or not to cancel the  
setting after shooting images with the self-timer.  
Allows you to select the vibration reduction  
setting used when shooting.  
Vibration reduction  
AF assist  
Allows you to enable or disable the AF-assist  
illuminator.  
ISO sensitivity step Allows you to set the step value of the sensitivity  
value  
to be set for ISO sensitivity of the quick menu.  
Allows you to set the operation of digital zoom.  
Allows you to set the zoom operation speed.  
Digital zoom  
Zoom speed  
When set to On, zoom operates while keeping  
changes in the aperture value to a minimum in C  
or Dshooting mode.  
Fixed aperture  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
99  
                               
Option  
Description  
A
Sound settings  
Allows you to adjust sound settings.  
Allows you to set whether or not to record the  
Record orientation “tall” orientation data on the images that are shot  
with the camera held in “tall” orientation.  
Allows you to set whether or not to rotate the  
images in accordance with the “tall” or landscape  
orientation of the camera during playback.  
Rotate tall  
Auto off  
Allows you to set the amount of time that passes  
before the monitor turns off to save power.  
Format memory/  
Format card  
Allows you to format the internal memory or the  
memory card.  
Allows you to change the camera’s display  
language.  
Language  
TV settings  
Allows you to adjust TV-connection settings.  
External mic  
sensitivity  
Allows you to set the external microphone  
sensitivity.  
Allows you to swap the function of the main  
command dial for that of the sub-command dial  
when the exposure is set (A49).  
Customize  
command dials  
Command dial  
rotation  
Allows you to set the direction of operation when  
the command dial is rotated during shooting.  
When set to AF area mode, the AF area mode  
setting is displayed if the multi selector K(G) is  
pressed during shooting.  
Multi selector right  
press  
When set to Press twice to delete, the image  
can be deleted by pressing the lbutton again  
while the delete confirmation message is  
displayed.  
Delete button  
options  
Allows you to select the function to be performed  
when the AE-L/AF-L button is pressed during  
shooting.  
AE/AF lock button  
Allows you to set the function to be performed  
when the shutter-release button is pressed while  
pressing the w1 (function 1) button during  
shooting.  
Fn1 + shutter  
button  
Allows you to set the function to be performed  
when the command dial is rotated while pressing  
the w1 (function 1) button during shooting.  
Fn1 + command  
dial  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
100  
                             
Option  
Description  
A
Allows you to set the function to be performed  
when the multi selector is rotated while pressing  
the w1 (function 1) button during shooting.  
Fn1 + selector dial  
Allows you to set whether or not to display guides  
for the functions assigned to Fn1 + shutter  
button, Fn1 + command dial and Fn1 +  
selector dial in the monitor, when the w1  
(function 1) button is pressed during shooting.  
Fn1 guide display  
Fn2 button  
Allows you to set the operation to be performed  
when the w2 (function 2) button is pressed.  
Customize My  
Menu  
Allows you to register frequently used menu items  
in My Menu (A72) (up to 5 items).  
Reset file  
numbering  
Allows you to reset the sequential numbering of  
file numbers when Yes is selected.  
Allows you to configure settings for the optional  
Wireless Remote Controller WR-R10 or GPS unit  
when either one is attached to the accessory  
terminal.  
Accessory terminal  
Eye-Fi upload  
Allows you to set whether or not to enable the  
function for sending images to a computer using  
a commercially available Eye-Fi card.  
Allows you to set the unit of distance for  
displaying at screen gauge, to either m (meter) or  
ft (feet) when using manual focus.  
MF distance  
indicator units  
Allows you to set the +/– display direction of  
indicators that are displayed for setting the  
exposure and bracketing when shooting mode is  
D.  
Reverse indicators  
Flash control  
When set to Auto, the external flash unit  
(optional) fires when it is attached to the camera.  
Allows you to reset the camera’s settings to their  
default values.  
Reset all  
Firmware version  
View the current camera firmware version.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
101  
                       
Connecting the Camera to a TV,  
Computer, or Printer  
Connection Methods  
You can enhance your enjoyment of images and movies by connecting the  
camera to a TV, computer, or printer.  
HDMI mini connector  
(Type C)  
USB/audio/video output  
connector  
Open the connector  
cover.  
Insert the plug straight.  
Before connecting the camera to an external device, make sure the  
remaining battery level is sufficient and turn the camera off. Before  
disconnecting, make sure to turn the camera off.  
If the AC Adapter EH-5b and the Power Connector EP-5A (available  
separately) (E104) are used, this camera can be powered from an electrical  
outlet. Do not use any other make or model of AC adapter or power  
connector as it may cause the camera to heat up or malfunction.  
For information about the connection methods and subsequent operations,  
refer to the documentation included with the device in addition to this  
document.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
102  
         
Viewing images on a TV  
Images and movies captured with the camera can be viewed  
on a TV.  
Connection method: Connect the video and audio plugs of  
the optional Audio Video Cable EG-CP16 (E104) to the TV’s  
input jacks. Alternatively, connect a commercially available  
HDMI cable to the TV’s HDMI input jack.  
Viewing and organizing images on a computer  
You can transfer images to a computer to perform simple  
retouching and manage image data.  
Connection method: Connect the camera to the computer’s  
USB port with the included USB cable.  
Before connecting to a computer, install ViewNX 2 on the  
computer (A104).  
Printing images without using a computer  
If you connect the camera to a PictBridge-compatible printer,  
you can print images without using a computer.  
Connection method: Connect the camera directly to the  
printer’s USB port with the included USB cable.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
103  
     
Using ViewNX 2  
ViewNX 2 is an all-in-one software package which enables you to transfer, view,  
edit and share images. Install ViewNX 2 using the included ViewNX 2 CD-ROM.  
ViewNX 2™  
Your Imaging Toolbox  
Installing ViewNX 2  
Compatible Operating Systems  
Windows  
Windows 8, Windows 7, Windows Vista, Windows XP  
Macintosh  
Mac OS X 10.6, 10.7, 10.8  
Refer to the Nikon website for details on system requirements, including the  
latest information on operating system compatibility.  
1
Start the computer and insert the ViewNX 2 CD-ROM into  
the CD-ROM drive.  
Windows: If instructions for operating the CD-ROM are displayed in the  
window, follow the instructions to proceed to the installation window.  
Mac OS: When the ViewNX 2 window is displayed, double-click the  
Welcome icon.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
104  
     
2
Select a language in the language selection dialog to open  
the installation window.  
If the desired language is not available, click Region Selection to choose a  
different region and then choose the desired language (the Region  
Selection button is not available in the European release).  
Click Next to display the installation window.  
3
4
Start the installer.  
We recommend clicking Installation Guide in the installation window to  
check the installation help information and system requirements before  
installing ViewNX 2.  
Click Typical Installation (Recommended) in the installation window.  
Follow the on-screen instructions to install the software.  
Exit the installer when the installation completion screen is  
displayed.  
Windows: Click Yes.  
Mac OS: Click OK.  
The following software is installed:  
ViewNX 2 (consisting of the three modules below)  
-
-
-
Nikon Transfer 2: For transferring images to the computer  
ViewNX 2: For viewing, editing, and printing transferred images  
Nikon Movie Editor: For basic editing of transferred movies  
Panorama Maker (for creating a single panorama photo using a series of  
images shot in panorama assist scene mode)  
5
Remove the ViewNX 2 CD-ROM from the CD-ROM drive.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
105  
 
Transferring Images to the Computer  
1
Choose how images will be copied to the computer.  
Choose one of the following methods:  
Direct USB connection: Turn the camera off and ensure that the memory  
card is inserted in the camera. Connect the camera to the computer using  
the included USB cable. The camera automatically turns on.  
To transfer images that are saved in the camera’s internal memory, remove  
the memory card from the camera before connecting it to the computer.  
SD card slot: If your computer is equipped with an SD card slot, the card can  
be inserted directly in the slot.  
SD card reader: Connect a card reader (available separately from third-party  
suppliers) to the computer and insert the memory card.  
If a message is displayed prompting you to choose a program, select Nikon  
Transfer 2.  
When using Windows 7  
If the dialog shown at right is  
displayed, follow the steps  
below to select Nikon Transfer  
2.  
P7800  
P7800  
P7800  
1
Under Import pictures  
and videos, click Change  
program. A program  
selection dialog will be  
displayed; select Import File using Nikon Transfer 2 and click OK.  
2
Double-click Import File.  
If the memory card contains a large number of images, it may take a while for  
Nikon Transfer 2 to start. Wait until Nikon Transfer 2 starts.  
B Connecting the USB Cable  
The connection may not be recognized if the camera is connected to the computer  
via a USB hub.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
106  
   
2
Transfer images to the computer.  
Confirm that the name of the connected camera or removable disk is  
displayed as the “Source” on the “Options” title bar of Nikon Transfer 2 ( ).  
1
Click Start Transfer ( ).  
2
P7800  
1
2
At default settings, all the images on the memory card will be copied to the  
computer.  
Images are displayed in ViewNX 2 when transfer is complete.  
3
Terminate the connection.  
If the camera is connected to the computer, turn the camera off and  
disconnect the USB cable.  
If you are using a card reader or card slot, choose the appropriate option in  
the computer operating system to eject the removable disk corresponding  
to the memory card and then remove the card from the card reader or card  
slot.  
C Starting ViewNX 2 Manually  
• Windows: Double-click the ViewNX 2 shortcut on the desktop.  
• Mac OS: Click the ViewNX 2 icon in the Dock.  
Consult online help for more information on using ViewNX 2.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
108  
Reference Section  
The Reference Section provides detailed information and hints about using the  
camera.  
Shooting  
Using Panorama Assist ..................................................................... E5  
Playback  
(Sequence) ............................................................................................ E7  
Editing Still Images ............................................................................ E9  
Editing Movies...................................................................................E25  
Menu  
The Quick Menu................................................................................E27  
The Shooting Menu (A, B, Cor DMode)..............................E44  
The Playback Menu..........................................................................E62  
The Setup Menu................................................................................E72  
Additional Information  
Error Messages ..................................................................................E99  
File Names........................................................................................ E103  
Optional Accessories.................................................................... E104  
Shooting with Remote Control ML-L3................................... E106  
Speedlights (External Flash Unit)............................................. E108  
Using the GPS Unit........................................................................ E113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E1  
   
Using Easy Panorama (Shooting and  
Playback)  
Shooting with Easy Panorama  
Rotate the mode dial to yMdbutton Mp Panorama  
1
2
Use the multi selector HIto  
select V Easy panorama and  
press the kbutton.  
Panorama  
Easy panorama  
Panorama assist  
Select W Normal (180°) or X  
Wide (360°) as the shooting  
range and press the kbutton.  
Easy panorama  
Normal (180°)  
Wide (360°)  
When the camera is readied in the  
horizontal position, the image size (width ×  
height) is as follows.  
- W Normal (180°):  
3200 × 560 when moved horizontally,  
1024 × 3200 when moved vertically  
- X Wide (360°):  
6400 × 560 when moved horizontally,  
1024 × 6400 when moved vertically  
3
Frame the first edge of the  
panorama scene, and then press  
the shutter-release button  
halfway to focus.  
The zoom position is fixed at wide-angle.  
The camera focuses on the area in the  
center of the frame.  
1/250  
F53.61  
1840  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E2  
     
4
5
Press the shutter-release button  
all the way, and then remove your  
finger from the shutter-release  
button.  
KLJIare displayed to indicate the  
direction of camera movement.  
Move the camera in one of the  
four directions until the guide  
indicator reaches the end.  
When the camera detects which direction  
it is moving in, shooting begins.  
Guide  
Example of Camera Movement  
Using your body as the axis of rotation,  
move the camera slowly in an arc, in  
the direction of the marking  
(KLJI).  
Shooting stops if the guide does not  
reach the edge within about 15  
seconds (when W Normal (180°) is  
selected) or within about 30 seconds  
(when X Wide (360°) is selected)  
after shooting starts.  
B Notes About Easy Panorama Shooting  
The range of the image seen in the saved image is narrower than that seen in the  
monitor at the time of shooting.  
If the camera is moved too quickly or shaken too much, or if the subject is too  
uniform (e.g. walls or darkness), an error may occur.  
If shooting is stopped before the camera reaches the half-way point in the  
panorama range, a panorama image is not saved.  
If more than half of the panorama range is captured but shooting ends before  
reaching the edge of the range, the range not captured is recorded and displayed  
in gray.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E3  
Viewing Images Captured with Easy Panorama  
Switch to playback mode (A36), display an  
image captured using easy panorama in full-  
21051/111//0250/135 15:30  
0004.JPG  
frame playback mode, and then press the k  
button to scroll the image in the direction that  
was used when shooting.  
Rotate the multi selector to scroll forward or  
backward quickly.  
4/ 132  
Playback controls are displayed at the top of the  
monitor during playback.  
Use the multi selector JKto select a control,  
and then press the kbutton to perform the  
following operations.  
Function  
Rewind  
Icon  
A
B
Description  
Hold down the kbutton to scroll backward quickly.*  
Hold down the kbutton to scroll forward quickly.*  
Advance  
Pause playback. The operations listed below can be  
performed while paused.  
C
D
F
Hold down the kbutton to rewind.*  
Hold down the kbutton to scroll.*  
Resume automatic scrolling.  
Pause  
End  
E
G
Switch to full-frame playback mode.  
*
These operations can also be performed by rotating the multi selector.  
B Notes About Scroll Playback  
This camera may not be able to scroll the playback of, or zoom in on, easy panorama  
images captured with another make or model of digital camera.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E4  
   
Using Panorama Assist  
Using a tripod makes the composition easier. When using a tripod to stabilize  
the camera, set Vibration reduction (E79) to Off in the setup menu.  
Rotate the mode dial to yMdbutton Mp Panorama  
1
2
Use the multi selector HIto  
select U Panorama assist and  
press the kbutton.  
Panorama  
Easy panorama  
Panorama assist  
Use HIJKto select the  
direction in which images are  
joined, and press the kbutton.  
Apply flash mode (A59), self-timer  
(A62)/remote control (E106), focus  
mode (A64) and exposure compensation  
(A69) settings in this step, if necessary.  
Press the kbutton to reselect the  
direction.  
1/250  
F3.0  
1280  
3
Frame the first edge of the  
panorama scene, and take  
the first image.  
The camera focuses on the area  
in the center of the frame.  
About 1/3 of the image will be  
displayed as translucent.  
1280  
1/250  
F3.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E5  
   
4
5
Shoot the next image.  
Match the outline of the next  
image so that 1/3 of the frame  
overlaps the previous image, and  
press the shutter-release button.  
End  
1279  
Press the kbutton when shooting is completed.  
The camera returns to step 2.  
B Notes About Panorama Assist  
The panorama series is terminated if the auto off function (E84) triggers the  
standby mode during shooting. To prevent this, setting a longer time for the auto  
off function is recommended.  
Images cannot be deleted while shooting in panorama assist mode. When  
shooting a new image, return to step 2 and start over again.  
C R(Exposure Lock) Indicator  
When using panorama assist mode, all images in the  
panorama have the same exposure, white balance,  
and focus as the first image of the panorama.  
When the first image is shot, Ris displayed in  
the monitor to indicate that exposure, white balance,  
and focus are locked.  
End  
1279  
C Panorama Creation with Panorama  
Maker  
Transfer images to a computer (A106) and use Panorama Maker to join them in a  
single panorama.  
Panorama Maker can be installed on a computer using the included ViewNX 2 CD-  
For more information on using Panorama Maker, refer to the on-screen instructions  
and help information contained in Panorama Maker.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6  
 
Viewing and Deleting Images Captured  
Continuously (Sequence)  
Viewing Images in a Sequence  
Images captured continuously are saved as a sequence.  
The first image of a sequence is used as the key  
21051/121/0/250/153 15:30  
picture to represent the sequence when displayed  
0004.JPG  
in full-frame playback mode or thumbnail  
playback mode (default setting).  
To display each image in the sequence  
individually, press the kbutton.  
4
1352  
After pressing the kbutton, the operations listed  
below are available.  
15/11/2013 15:30  
0004.JPG  
To display the previous or next image, rotate  
the multi selector or press JK.  
To display images that are not included in the  
sequence, press Hto return to the key picture  
display.  
Back  
1
5
To display images in a sequence as thumbnails,  
or to play them back in a slide show, set Sequence display options to  
Individual pictures in the playback menu (E69).  
B Sequence Display Options  
Images captured continuously with cameras other than this camera cannot be  
displayed as a sequence.  
C Playback Menu Options Available When Using Sequence  
When images in a sequence are displayed in full-frame playback mode, press the  
dbutton to select functions in playback menu (A88).  
If you press the dbutton when a key picture is displayed, the following settings  
can be applied to all images in the sequence:  
- Print order, Protect, Copy  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E7  
       
Deleting Images in a Sequence  
When the lbutton is pressed for images in a sequence, the images that are  
deleted vary depending on how the sequences are displayed.  
When the key picture is displayed: All images in the displayed sequence are  
deleted.  
When images in a sequence are displayed in full-frame playback mode: The  
image currently displayed is deleted.  
When Delete (E65) of the playback menu is used, multiple images can be  
deleted or multiple images in the same sequence can be selected and deleted.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E8  
   
Editing Still Images  
Before Editing Images  
You can easily edit images on this camera. Edited copies are saved as separate  
files (E103).  
Edited copies are saved with the same shooting date and time as the original.  
C Restrictions on Image Editing  
Images taken using an aspect ratio of 16:9, 3:2 or 1:1 cannot be edited (except  
when using the black border editing function).  
Editing other than RAW (NRW) processing cannot be performed on RAW (NRW)  
images.  
Edit a JPEG image created with RAW (NRW) processing.  
If you select images taken with an image quality of RAW (NRW) + Fine or RAW  
(NRW) + Normal, only the JPEG images will be edited.  
Images that were extracted from a movie cannot be edited using the quick  
retouch or skin softening function.  
When an edited copy is further modified with another editing function, check the  
following restrictions.  
Editing function used  
Editing functions to use  
The skin softening, filter effects, small picture, black  
border, straighten, or crop function can be used.  
The quick retouch and D-Lighting functions cannot be  
used in combination.  
Quick retouch  
D-Lighting  
Skin softening  
Filter effects  
Straighten  
Other editing functions can be used.  
RAW (NRW) processing  
Another editing function cannot be used.  
When using in combination with other editing  
functions, use the small picture after the other editing  
functions have been applied.  
Small picture  
Black border  
Crop  
The small picture function can be used.  
The black border or straighten function can be used.  
Another editing function cannot be used if the  
image size is extremely small after the crop function  
is applied.  
Copies created with editing functions cannot be further edited with the same  
function used to create them.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E9  
       
k Quick Retouch: Enhancing Contrast and  
Saturation  
Select an image (A36) Mdbutton (A12) Mk Quick retouch  
Use the multi selector HIto select  
Quick retouch  
the desired effect level and press the  
kbutton.  
The edited version is displayed on the right.  
To exit without saving the copy, press J.  
Normal  
Amount  
I D-Lighting: Enhancing Brightness and Contrast  
Select an image (A36) Mdbutton (A12) MI D-Lighting  
Use the multi selector HIto select  
D-Lighting  
the desired effect level and press the  
kbutton.  
The edited version is displayed on the right.  
To exit without saving the copy, press J.  
Normal  
Amount  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E10  
       
e Skin Softening: Softening Skin Tones  
Select an image (A36) Mdbutton (A12) Me Skin softening  
1
2
Use the multi selector HIto  
select the desired effect level and  
press the kbutton.  
Skin softening  
To exit without saving the copy, press J.  
Normal  
Amount  
Preview the result and press the  
kbutton.  
Preview  
The edited face is zoomed in.  
When more than one face has been edited,  
press JKto switch the face that is  
displayed.  
Back  
Save  
To change the effect level, press the d  
button and return to step 1.  
An edited copy is created.  
B Notes About Skin Softening  
Up to 12 faces, in order of proximity to the center of the frame, can be enhanced.  
Depending upon the direction in which faces are looking, or the brightness of  
faces, the camera may be unable to accurately detect faces, or the skin softening  
function may not perform as expected.  
If no faces are detected, a warning is displayed and the screen returns to the  
playback menu.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E11  
   
p Filter Effects: Applying Digital Filter Effects  
Select an image (A36) Mdbutton (A12) Mp Filter effects  
Option  
Description  
Gently softens the focus of the image from the center to the  
edge. In images taken with face detection (A83) or pet  
detection (A45) selected, areas around faces will be blurred.  
Soft  
Keeps only a selected image color and makes other colors  
black-and-white.  
Selective color  
Cross screen  
Fisheye  
Produces star-like rays of light that radiate outward from  
bright objects such as sunlight reflections and city lights.  
Suitable for night scenes.  
Creates images that look like they were shot with a fisheye  
lens. Suitable for images shot in macro mode.  
Creates images that look like close-up photos of a diorama.  
Suitable for images shot while looking down from a high  
location, with the main subject near the center of the frame.  
Miniature effect  
Painting  
Vignette  
Creates images with the ambience of paintings.  
Creates images by lowering the peripheral light intensity from  
the center to the edges of an image.  
1
Use the multi selector HIto  
select the desired filter effect and  
press the kbutton.  
Filter effects  
Soft  
Selective color  
Cross screen  
Fisheye  
Miniature effect  
Painting  
When Cross screen, Fisheye, Miniature  
effect, Painting or Vignette is selected,  
proceed to step 3.  
Vignette  
2
Adjust the effect and press the k  
button.  
Soft  
Soft: Use HIto select the extent of the  
effect.  
Selective color: Use HIto select the  
color to keep.  
Normal  
Extent  
Soft  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E12  
   
3
Preview the result and press the k  
button.  
Preview  
An edited copy is created.  
To exit without saving the copy, press J.  
Back  
Save  
g Small Picture: Reducing the Size of an Image  
Select an image (A36) Mdbutton (A12) Mg Small picture  
1
2
Use the multi selector HIto  
select the desired copy size and  
press the kbutton.  
Small picture  
640×480  
320×240  
160×120  
Select Yes and press the k  
button.  
Create small picture file?  
An edited copy is created (compression  
ratio of approximately 1:16).  
Yes  
No  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E13  
   
j Black Border: Adding a Black Border to Images  
Select an image (A36) Mdbutton (A12) Mj Black border  
1
2
Use the multi selector HIto  
select the desired border  
thickness and press the kbutton.  
Black border  
Thin  
Medium  
Broad  
Select Yes and press the k  
button.  
Create a copy with a  
black border?  
An edited copy is created.  
Yes  
No  
B Notes About Black Border  
A portion of the image equivalent to the thickness of the black border is cut off  
because the black border overlaps the image.  
When an image with a black border is printed using a printer’s borderless print  
function, the black border may not be printed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E14  
   
R Straighten: Compensating for Image Slanting  
Select an image (A36) Mdbutton (A12) MR Straighten  
Use the multi selector to compensate  
Straighten  
for slanting and press the kbutton.  
Press Jto rotate counterclockwise by 1  
degree.  
Press Kto rotate clockwise by 1 degree.  
To cancel, press the dbutton.  
Back  
Rotate  
B Notes About Straighten  
The larger the slant for which compensation is performed, the larger the area  
around the image that is cut.  
Straighten can be performed up to 15 degrees.  
F RAW (NRW) Processing: Creating JPEG  
Images from NRW Images  
Press the cbutton (playback mode) Mdbutton (A12) M  
F RAW (NRW) processing  
1
Use the multi selector HIJKto  
select the image to be RAW  
processed and press the k  
button.  
RAW (NRW) processing  
Back  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E15  
       
2
3
Set the RAW (NRW) processing  
parameters.  
RAW (NRW) processing  
EXE  
Apply the settings below while checking  
the image and moving the zoom control  
toward g(i). Move toward g(i) again to  
return to the setting screen.  
Reset  
Check  
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
White balance (E35)  
Exp. +/-  
Picture Control (E40)  
Image quality (E27)  
Image size (E29)  
Distortion control (E55)  
D-Lighting (E10)  
Press the lbutton to change back to the default settings.  
Select EXE when all settings have been adjusted.  
Select Yes and press the kbutton.  
A JPEG image is created.  
Create a JPEG copy at these  
settings?  
Yes  
No  
B Notes About RAW (NRW) Processing  
This camera can only create JPEG-format copies of RAW (NRW) images taken with  
this camera.  
The image is cropped if Image size is set to I 3984×2656, u 3968×2232  
or H 3000×3000.  
• Preset manual of White balance can only be selected for images taken with  
White balance set to Preset manual.  
The Noise reduction filter (E54) that was set for shooting images is applied to  
the JPEG images to be created.  
C More Information  
See “Printing Images of Size 1:1” (E29) for more information.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E16  
aCrop: Creating a Cropped Copy  
1
2
Move the zoom control to enlarge the image (A86).  
Refine copy composition and  
press the dbutton.  
Move the zoom control toward g(i) or f  
(h) to adjust the zoom ratio. Set a zoom  
ratio at which uis displayed.  
Use the multi selector HIJKto scroll  
the image so that only the portion to be  
copied is visible in the monitor.  
4.0  
3
Select Yes and press the kbutton.  
An edited copy is created.  
Save this image as  
displayed?  
Yes  
No  
C Image Size  
When the image size of the cropped copy is 320 × 240 or smaller, the image is  
displayed at a smaller size during playback.  
C Cropping the Image in Its Current “Tall” Orientation  
Use the Rotate image option (E66) to rotate the image so that it is displayed in  
landscape orientation. After cropping the image, rotate the cropped image back to  
“tall” orientation.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E17  
   
Connecting the Camera to a TV (Viewing Images  
on a TV)  
1
Turn off the camera and connect it to the TV.  
Make sure that the plugs are properly oriented. Do not insert or remove the  
plugs at an angle when connecting or disconnecting them.  
When using the optional audio video cable (E104)  
Yellow White Red  
When using a commercially available HDMI cable  
to HDMI jack  
HDMI mini connector  
(Type C)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E18  
       
2
3
Set the TV's input to external video input.  
See the documentation provided with your TV for details.  
Hold down the cbutton to turn  
on the camera.  
Images are displayed on the TV.  
The camera monitor does not turn on.  
B If Images Are Not Displayed on the TV  
Make sure that TV settings (E86) in the setup menu conforms to the standard  
used by your TV.  
C Using a TV Remote Control (HDMI Device Control)  
The remote control of an HDMI-CEC-compatible TV can be used to select images,  
start and pause movie playback, switch between full-screen playback mode and  
four-image thumbnail display, etc.  
Set HDMI device control (E86) of TV settings to On (default setting) in the  
setup menu, and then connect the camera and TV using an HDMI cable.  
Aim the remote control at the TV when operating it.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E19  
 
Connecting the Camera to a Printer (Direct  
Print)  
Users of PictBridge-compatible printers can connect the camera directly to the  
printer and print images without using a computer.  
Connecting the Camera to a Printer  
1
2
Turn off the camera.  
Turn on the printer.  
Check printer settings.  
3
Connect the camera to the printer using the included USB  
cable.  
Make sure that the plugs are properly oriented. Do not insert or remove the  
plugs at an angle when connecting or disconnecting them.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E20  
           
4
The camera is automatically turned on.  
The PictBridge startup screen (1) is displayed in the camera monitor,  
followed by the Print selection screen (2).  
Print selection  
15/11  
2013  
NO. 32  
32  
C More Information  
See “Printing Images of Size 1:1” (E29) for more information.  
Printing Individual Images  
1
2
3
Use the multi selector HIJKto  
select the desired image and press  
the kbutton.  
Print selection  
15/11  
2013  
Move the zoom control toward f(h) to  
switch to thumbnail playback or g(i) to  
switch to full-frame playback.  
NO. 32  
32  
Use HIto select Copies and  
press the kbutton.  
PictBridge  
1
prints  
Start print  
Copies  
Paper size  
Select the desired number of  
copies (up to 9) and press the k  
button.  
Copies  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E21  
   
4
5
Select Paper size and press the k  
PictBridge  
button.  
4
prints  
Start print  
Copies  
Paper size  
Select the desired paper size and  
press the kbutton.  
Paper size  
Default  
3.5×5 in.  
5×7 in.  
100×150 mm  
4×6 in.  
To apply the paper size setting configured  
on the printer, select Default as the paper  
size option.  
8×10 in.  
Letter  
The paper size options available on the  
camera vary depending on the printer that  
you use.  
6
Select Start print and press the k  
PictBridge  
button.  
4
prints  
Printing starts.  
To cancel printing, press the kbutton.  
Start print  
Copies  
Paper size  
Printing Multiple Images  
1
When the Print selection screen  
is displayed, press the dbutton.  
Print selection  
15/11  
2013  
NO. 32  
32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E22  
   
2
3
Use the multi selector HIto  
select Paper size and press the k  
button.  
Print menu  
Print selection  
Print all images  
DPOF printing  
Paper size  
To exit the print menu, press the d  
button.  
Select the desired paper size and  
press the kbutton.  
Paper size  
Default  
3.5×5 in.  
5×7 in.  
100×150 mm  
4×6 in.  
8×10 in.  
Letter  
To apply the paper size setting configured  
on the printer, select Default as the paper  
size option.  
The paper size options available on the  
camera vary depending on the printer that  
you use.  
4
Select Print selection, Print all  
images, or DPOF printing and  
press the kbutton.  
Print menu  
Print selection  
Print all images  
DPOF printing  
Paper size  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E23  
Print selection  
Select images (up to 99) and the  
number of copies (up to 9) of each.  
Print selection  
Use the multi selector JKto select  
images, and use HIto specify the  
number of copies to be printed.  
Images selected for printing are  
indicated by the check mark icon  
and the numeral indicating the  
1
1
2
3
Back  
number of copies to be printed. If no copies have been specified for  
images, the selection is canceled.  
Move the zoom control toward g(i) to switch to full-frame  
playback or f(h) to switch to thumbnail playback.  
Press the kbutton when setting is complete.  
When the screen shown on the  
right is displayed, select Start  
print and press the kbutton to  
Print selection  
10 prints  
start printing.  
Start print  
Cancel  
Print all images  
One copy each of all images saved in  
Print all images  
the internal memory, or on the  
memory card, is printed.  
18 prints  
When the screen shown on the  
right is displayed, select Start  
print and press the kbutton to  
start printing.  
Start print  
Cancel  
DPOF printing  
Print images for which a print order  
DPOF printing  
was created using the Print order  
option (E62).  
10 prints  
When the screen shown on the  
right is displayed, select Start  
print and press the kbutton to  
start printing.  
Start print  
View images  
Cancel  
To view the current print order,  
select View images and press the  
kbutton. To print images, press the kbutton again.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E24  
 
Editing Movies  
Extracting Only the Desired Portion of a Movie  
The desired portion of a recorded movie can be saved as a separate file.  
1
2
Play back the desired movie and pause at the start point of  
the portion that is to be extracted (A98).  
Use the multi selector JKto  
select the I control, and then  
press the kbutton.  
7m42s  
3
4
5
Use HIto select the M control  
(Choose start point).  
Choose start point  
Use the multi selector JKor rotate it to  
move the start point.  
To cancel editing, select O (Back), and  
press the kbutton.  
8m48s  
Use HIto select  
K
(Choose end  
Choose end point  
point).  
Use the multi selector JKor rotate it to  
move the end point.  
To preview the specified portion, use HIto  
select  
the  
W
and then press the  
k
button. Press  
5m52s  
Save  
k
button again to stop previewing.  
Use HIto select m (Save) and  
press the kbutton.  
Follow the instructions on the screen to save  
the movie.  
5m52s  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E25  
     
B Notes About Movie Editing  
Use a sufficiently charged battery to prevent the camera from turning off during  
editing. When the battery level indicator is B, movie editing is not possible.  
A movie that was created by editing cannot be trimmed again.  
The actual trimmed portion of a movie may differ slightly from the portion selected  
using the start and end points.  
Movies cannot be trimmed so that they are less than two seconds long.  
Saving a Frame from a Movie as a Still Image  
The desired frame of a recorded movie can be extracted and saved as a still  
image.  
Pause a movie and display the frame to be  
extracted (A98).  
Use the multi selector JKto select the  
H control and press the kbutton.  
7m42s  
Select Yes when a confirmation dialog is  
displayed, and press the kbutton to save the  
image.  
The still image is saved with Normal as the  
image quality. The image size is determined by  
the type (image size) (E30) of the original  
movie.  
Copy this frame as a still image?  
Yes  
No  
For example, a still image saved from a movie  
recorded with d 1080P/30p (or o 1080P/25p) is i (1920 × 1080  
pixels).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E26  
   
The Quick Menu  
aImage Quality and Image Size  
Display the still image shooting screen Mnbutton Ma(Image  
quality/Image size) tab (A70)  
Set the image quality (compression ratio) and image size (number of pixels)  
used when saving images.  
Available Image Quality  
Lower compression ratios result in higher quality images, but the number of  
images that can be saved is reduced.  
Option  
Fine  
Description  
Fine image quality than Normal.  
File format: JPEG, compression ratio of about 1:4  
a
b
d
Normal  
Normal image quality, suitable for most applications.  
(default setting) File format: JPEG, compression ratio of about 1:8  
Two images are recorded at the same time: one RAW  
(NRW) image and one fine-quality JPEG image.  
RAW (NRW) +  
Fine  
Two images are recorded at the same time: one RAW  
(NRW) image and one normal-quality JPEG image.  
RAW (NRW) +  
Normal  
e
Raw data from the image sensor are saved. Create JPEG  
image files after shooting using RAW (NRW)  
processing (E15) in the playback menu.  
F
RAW (NRW)  
When RAW (NRW) is selected, Image size is reset  
to F 4000×3000.  
File format: RAW (NRW), Nikon's own format  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E27  
             
C RAW (NRW) Images of This Camera  
To print or edit RAW (NRW) images, use JPEG images created from the RAW (NRW)  
images using RAW (NRW) processing (E15). RAW (NRW) images cannot be  
printed or edited.  
ViewNX 2 (A104) needs to be installed on the computer to be able to view RAW  
(NRW) images on the computer. Capture NX 2 is also compatible with RAW (NRW)  
images.  
C Image Quality Setting  
The image quality can be set in any shooting mode. The setting is also applied to  
other shooting modes (except E, Fand Nshooting modes and Easy  
panorama scene mode).  
RAW (NRW) images cannot be recorded in the following shooting modes.  
- Scene mode  
- Special effects mode (except Zoom exposure and Defocus during exposure)  
If you change the shooting mode to either of the above shooting modes when a  
RAW (NRW) image quality has been selected, the image quality will change to Fine  
or Normal.  
Digital zoom cannot be used when Image quality is set to RAW (NRW), RAW  
(NRW) + Fine or RAW (NRW) + Normal.  
The setting may not be changed when using certain settings of other functions.  
C Recording of RAW (NRW) and JPEG Images at the Same Time  
The RAW (NRW) image and the JPEG image that are recorded at the same time  
have the same file number but with their own file extensions, “.NRW” and “.JPG”  
When playing back on the camera, only the JPEG image is displayed.  
Note that when the JPEG image is deleted by pressing the lbutton, the RAW  
(NRW) image that was recorded at the same time is also deleted.  
C Number of Images That Can Be Saved  
The approximate number of images that can be saved can be checked in the  
monitor when shooting (A26).  
Note that due to JPEG compression, the number of images that can be saved may vary  
greatly depending on the image content, even when using memory cards with the same  
capacity and the same image quality and image size settings. In addition, the number of  
images that can be saved may vary depending on the make of the memory card.  
If the number of exposures remaining is 10,000 or more, the number of exposures  
remaining display shows “9999”.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E28  
 
Available Image Size  
Set the image size (number of pixels) used when saving JPEG images.  
The larger the image size, the larger the size at which it can be printed, but the  
number of images that can be saved is reduced.  
Option  
4000×3000 (default setting)  
3264×2448  
Aspect ratio (horizontal to vertical)  
F
E
L
B
f
I
u
H
4:3  
4:3  
4:3  
4:3  
4:3  
3:2  
16:9  
1:1  
2272×1704  
1600×1200  
640×480  
3984×2656  
3968×2232  
3000×3000  
C Image Size Setting  
The image size can be set in any shooting mode. The setting is also applied to  
other shooting modes (except E, Fand Nshooting modes and Easy  
panorama scene mode).  
The size of JPEG images can be selected when you create JPEG images from RAW  
(NRW) images using RAW (NRW) processing (E15) (up to a maximum of 4000  
× 3000 pixels).  
• Image size for the JPEG image can be set when RAW (NRW) + Fine or RAW  
(NRW) + Normal is selected. However, note that I 3984×2656, u 3968×2232  
and H 3000×3000 cannot be selected.  
The setting may not be changed when using certain settings of other functions.  
C Printing Images of Size 1:1  
Change the printer setting to “Border” when printing images with the size set to 1:1.  
The images may not be printed in 1:1 ratio depending on the printer.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E29  
       
aMovie Options  
Rotate the mode dial to eor hMnbutton Ma(Movie options)  
tab (A70)  
Select the desired movie option to record.  
Select normal speed movie options to record at normal speed, or HS movie  
options (E31) to record in slow or fast motion.  
Memory cards (Class 6 or higher) are recommended for recording movies  
Normal Speed Movie Options  
Option (Image size/  
Frame rate, File format)*  
Aspect ratio  
(horizontal to vertical)  
Image size  
1080P/30p  
d
1920 × 1080  
(High)  
1080P/25p  
o
16:9  
(default setting)  
e
p
1080/30p  
1080/25p  
1920 × 1080  
1280 × 720  
640 × 480  
16:9  
16:9  
4:3  
f
r
720/30p  
720/25p  
g
s
480/30p  
480/25p  
*
The items and frame rate that can be set vary depending on the settings of Video  
mode in the TV settings (E86) setup menu. The frame rate can be set to about  
30 fps for NTSC, and about 25 fps for PAL.  
B Notes About Movie Custom Setting Mode  
g 480/30p (or s 480/25p) of normal speed movies and HS movies cannot  
be selected.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E30  
     
HS Movie Options (e(Movie) Mode Only)  
Recorded movies are played back in fast or slow motion.  
information.  
Image size  
Aspect ratio  
Option  
Description  
(horizontal to vertical)  
1/4-speed slow motion movies  
h
u
640 × 480  
4:3  
Max. recording time:  
7 minutes 15 seconds  
(playback time: 29 minutes)  
HS 480/4×  
1/2-speed slow motion movies  
i
w
1280 × 720  
16:9  
Max. recording time:  
14 minutes 30 seconds  
(playback time: 29 minutes)  
HS 720/2×  
2× speed fast motion movies  
j
x
HS 1080/  
0.5×  
1920 × 1080  
16:9  
Max. recording time:  
29 minutes (playback time:  
14 minutes 30 seconds)  
B Notes About HS Movie  
Sound is not recorded.  
Zoom position, focus, exposure, and white balance are locked when movie  
recording starts.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E31  
   
C Playing Back in Slow Motion and Fast Motion  
When recording at normal speed:  
Recording  
10 s  
time  
Playback  
time  
10 s  
When recording at h/u HS 480/4×:  
Movies are recorded at 4× normal speed.  
They are played back in slow motion at 4× slower speed.  
Recording  
time  
10 s  
Playback  
time  
40 s  
Slow motion playback  
When recording at j/x HS 1080/0.5×:  
Movies are recorded at 1/2 normal speed.  
They are played back in fast motion at 2× faster speed.  
Recording  
10 s  
time  
Playback  
5 s  
time  
Fast motion playback  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E32  
   
bISO Sensitivity  
Rotate the mode dial to A, B, C, D, E, F, Nor hMnbutton M  
b(ISO sensitivity) tab (A70)  
Higher ISO sensitivity allows darker subjects to be captured. Additionally, even  
with subjects of similar brightness, images can be taken at faster shutter  
speeds, and blurring caused by camera shake and subject movement can be  
reduced.  
When higher ISO sensitivity is set, images may contain noise.  
Option  
Description  
Auto (default setting):  
ISO sensitivity is automatically adjusted within a range  
from ISO 80 to 1600.  
X ISO 80-200, Y ISO 80-400, Z ISO 80-800  
(fixed range auto):  
ISO sensitivity  
Restrict the range in which the camera automatically  
adjusts ISO sensitivity.  
80 to 3200, Hi 1 (equivalent to ISO 6400):  
ISO sensitivity is fixed at the specified value.  
Set the shutter speed at which ISO sensitivity starts to be  
automatically adjusted, when the shooting mode is Aor C.  
If the exposure is insufficient with the shutter speed that is set  
here, the ISO sensitivity is increased automatically to obtain  
the correct exposure.  
Minimum shutter  
speed  
The setting is enabled when ISO sensitivity is set to Auto,  
ISO 80-200, ISO 80-400 or ISO 80-800.  
If the exposure is still insufficient even after ISO sensitivity is  
increased, the shutter speed slows down.  
Default setting: None  
C ISO Sensitivity Display on the Shooting Screen  
When Auto is selected, Eis displayed if the ISO sensitivity automatically  
increases.  
When ISO 80-200, ISO 80-400 or ISO 80-800 is selected, the maximum  
value for ISO sensitivity is displayed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E33  
     
B Notes About ISO Sensitivity  
In D(manual) mode, when set to Auto, ISO 80-200, ISO 80-400 or ISO 80-800,  
the ISO sensitivity is fixed at ISO 80.  
The setting may not be changed when using certain settings of other functions.  
B Notes About ISO Sensitivity Settings in h(Movie Custom  
Setting) Mode  
When Shooting mode (E70) of the movie custom setting menu is set to  
Special effects, ISO sensitivity cannot be set.  
• ISO 80-200, ISO 80-400, ISO 80-800, Hi 1 and Minimum shutter speed cannot  
be selected.  
When Shooting mode is set to Aperture-priority auto with ISO sensitivity set  
to Auto, ISO sensitivity is automatically adjusted within a range from ISO 80 to  
3200. When Shooting mode is set to Manual, ISO sensitivity is fixed at ISO 80.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E34  
cWhite Balance (Adjusting Hue)  
Rotate the mode dial to A, B, C, D, E, F, N, eor hM  
nbutton Mc(White balance) tab (A70)  
Adjust white balance to suit the light source or weather conditions in order to  
make the colors in images match what you see with your eyes.  
Use Auto (normal) under most conditions. Change the setting when you  
want to adjust the hue of the image you are taking.  
Description  
Option  
White balance is automatically adjusted to suit  
lighting conditions.  
When set to Auto (warm lighting), the images are  
preserved with warm colors if they are shot under an  
incandescent light source. When using the flash,  
white balance is adjusted according to the flash  
lighting condition.  
Auto (normal)  
a1  
(default setting)  
Auto (warm  
lighting)  
a2  
c
d
Daylight  
White balance is adjusted for direct sunlight.  
Use under incandescent lighting.  
Incandescent  
Select one of Fluorescent FL1 (white fluorescent),  
Fluorescent FL2 (daylight white/neutral  
fluorescent) and Fluorescent FL3 (daylight  
fluorescent).  
x
y
z
Fluorescent FL1  
Fluorescent FL2  
Fluorescent FL3  
f
g
Cloudy  
Flash  
Use when taking images under overcast skies.  
Use with the flash.  
Use to directly specify color temperature (E36).  
Choose color  
temp.  
Select x Choose color temp. of White balance  
in the first line, and then select the value of  
Choose color temp. in the second line.  
x
b1  
b2  
b3  
Use when the desired result is not achieved with  
Auto (normal), Auto (warm lighting),  
Incandescent, etc. (E37).  
Preset manual 1  
Preset manual 2  
Preset manual 3  
B Notes About White Balance  
Lower the flash when white balance is set to any setting other than Auto  
(normal), Auto (warm lighting) or Flash (A59).  
The setting may not be changed when using certain settings of other functions.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E35  
   
C Fine Adjustment of White Balance  
To perform fine adjustment of white balance, select  
Fine-tune and press the kbutton.  
Use the multi selector HIJKto configure  
Fine-tune  
settings.  
“A” represents amber, “B” blue, “G” green, and “M”  
magenta.  
Back  
Reset  
Press the lbutton to reset.  
Rotate the sub-command dial to return to the  
previous screen.  
The color displayed in the fine-tune screen represents the approximate color in the  
color temperature direction. A fine-tuned color may not be exactly the same as that in  
the image. For example, when the white balance is set to Incandescent, the image  
will not have a strong blue color even if fine adjustment is performed in the B (blue)  
direction.  
C Color Temperature  
Color temperature is an objective measure of colors of light sources which are  
expressed in the unit of absolute temperature (K: Kelvin). Light sources with lower  
color temperatures appear more reddish, while light sources with higher color  
temperatures appear more bluish.  
Red  
Blue  
3000  
4000  
5000  
6000  
8000  
10000  
[K]  
1
2
3
4
567  
8
9
0
a
Sodium-vapor lamps: 2700K  
Incandescent/  
Flash: 5400K  
1
2
7
8
9
0
a
Cloudy: 6000K  
Warm-white fluorescent: 3000K  
Daylight fluorescent: 6500K  
White fluorescent: 3700K  
3
4
5
6
High temp. mercury-vapor: 7200K  
Shade: 8000K  
Cool-white fluorescent: 4200K  
Day white fluorescent: 5000K  
Direct sunlight: 5200K  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E36  
   
Using Preset Manual  
Use the procedure below to measure the white balance value under the  
lighting used during shooting.  
Up to 3 measured values can be saved: PRE1, PRE2 and PRE3.  
1
Place a white or gray reference object under the lighting  
that will be used during shooting.  
2
Use the multi selector JKto  
select PRE1, PRE2 or PRE3.  
White balance  
Preset manual  
Items can also be selected by rotating the  
main command dial.  
Fine-tune  
Preset manual 1  
3
4
Use Ito select Preset manual  
and JKto select PRE.  
White balance  
Preset manual  
Fine-tune  
The lens extends to the zoom position for  
measurement.  
To apply the last measured value, select f.  
Cancel  
Frame the white or gray reference  
object in the measuring window,  
and press the kbutton to  
measure the value.  
The shutter is released and measurement is  
complete. No image is saved.  
Measure  
Measuring window  
B Notes About Preset Manual  
A value for flash lighting cannot be measured with Preset manual. When shooting  
using the flash, set White balance to Auto (normal), Auto (warm lighting) or  
Flash.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E37  
   
dAuto Bracketing (Continuous Shooting While  
Changing the Exposure and White Balance)  
Rotate the mode dial to A, B, C, D, E, For NMnbutton Md  
(Auto bracketing) tab (A70)  
Continuous shooting can be performed while changing the exposure  
(brightness) automatically with the shutter speed (Tv), the aperture value (Av) or  
ISO sensitivity (Sv), or multiple images can be recorded while varying the white  
balance (WB). This is effective when adjusting the brightness of an image is  
difficult, or when multiple light sources are mixed together and it is difficult to  
decide the white balance.  
1
Use the multi selector JKto select  
the desired type of bracketing  
(E39), and press I.  
Auto bracketing  
Number of shots  
Increment  
Range  
Items can also be selected by rotating the  
main command dial.  
Reset  
2
Select the number of images to  
shoot and press I.  
Auto bracketing  
Number of shots  
Increment  
Range  
3 or 5 images can be selected.  
Reset  
3
4
Select the desired step increment  
of compensation.  
Auto bracketing  
Number of shots  
Increment  
Range  
For s (white balance bracketing), select  
Range and set the bracketing range.  
Reset  
Press the nbutton or the kbutton.  
The monitor display returns to the shooting screen.  
To change the values to the default setting, select Reset and press the k  
button.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E38  
   
Description  
Bracketing is not performed.  
Option  
OFF  
k
(default setting)  
When the shutter-release button is pressed all the  
way, images are captured continuously while the  
shutter speed is changed automatically.  
Exposure  
bracketing (Tv)  
e
“Tv” stands for “Time value.”  
When the shutter-release button is pressed all the  
way, images are captured continuously while the  
aperture value is changed automatically.  
Exposure  
bracketing (Av)  
h
r
s
“Av“ stands for “Aperture value.“  
When the shutter-release button is pressed all the  
way, images are captured continuously while  
changing the ISO sensitivity, with the shutter speed  
and aperture value fixed.  
Exposure  
bracketing (Sv)  
“Sv” stands for “Sensitivity value.”  
When the shutter-release button is pressed all the  
way, one image is captured, and the set number of  
images are recorded with the color temperature  
changed for each one.  
White balance  
bracketing  
Various types of bracketing can be set depending on the shooting mode.  
Exposure  
bracketing bracketing bracketing  
Exposure  
Exposure  
White  
balance  
Shooting mode  
(Tv)  
w
(Av)  
(Sv)  
bracketing  
A(Programmed auto)  
B(Shutter-priority auto)  
C(Aperture-priority auto)  
D(Manual)  
w
w
w
w
w
w
w
w
B Notes About Auto Bracketing  
When exposure compensation (A69) is set with AE Bracketing (Tv), AE  
Bracketing (Av) or AE Bracketing (Sv) simultaneously, a combined exposure  
compensation is applied. The new exposure compensation value updates the  
reference point to be displayed in the indicator.  
In White balance bracketing, only compensation for the color temperature  
(horizontal direction from A (amber) to B (blue)) is performed. Compensation in the  
vertical direction from G (green) to M (magenta) is not performed.  
The setting may not be changed when using certain settings of other functions.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E39  
 
a Picture Control (COOLPIX Picture Control)  
(Changing the Settings for Image Recording)  
Rotate the mode dial to A, B, C, D, E, F, Nor hMnbutton M  
a tab (A70)  
Change the settings for image recording according to the shooting scene or  
your preferences. Sharpness, contrast and saturation can be adjusted in detail.  
Description  
Option  
Standard  
Standard processing for balanced results. Recommended  
b
c
(default setting) for most situations.  
Minimal processing for natural results. Select for images  
that will later be extensively processed or retouched.  
Neutral  
Images are enhanced for a vivid, photoprint effect. Select  
for images that emphasize primary colors, such as blue,  
red, and green.  
d
Vivid  
Shoots monochrome photographs such as in black-and-  
white or sepia.  
e
f
g
Monochrome  
Changes to the setting of Custom 1 in COOLPIX Custom  
Picture Control.  
*
Custom 1  
Changes to the setting of Custom 2 in COOLPIX Custom  
Picture Control.  
*
Custom 2  
*
Only displayed when the setting customized in Custom Picture Control (E44)  
has been registered.  
B COOLPIX Picture Control  
The COOLPIX Picture Control function of this camera cannot be used with other  
makes of cameras, Capture NX, Capture NX 2 and ViewNX 2 Picture Control  
function.  
In h(movie custom setting) mode, Picture Control cannot be selected when  
Shooting mode (E70) of the movie custom setting menu is set to Special  
effects.  
The setting may not be changed when using certain settings of other functions.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E40  
   
Customizing Existing COOLPIX Picture Controls: Quick  
Adjust and Manual Adjust  
COOLPIX Picture Control can be customized using Quick adjust, which allows  
for balanced adjustment of sharpness, contrast, saturation and other image  
editing components, or manual adjust, which allows for detailed adjustment of  
the components individually.  
1
Use the multi selector HIto  
select the desired type of COOLPIX  
Picture Control and press the k  
button.  
Standard  
Neutral  
Vivid  
Monochrome  
Items can also be selected by rotating the  
main command dial.  
View grid  
2
Use HIto highlight the desired  
setting (E42) and use JKto  
select a value.  
Standard  
Quick adjust  
Image sharpening  
Contrast  
Saturation  
Press the kbutton to set the value.  
When COOLPIX Picture Controls are  
modified from the default settings, an  
asterisk (*) is displayed after the options in  
the Picture Control setting menu.  
Reset  
Back  
To change the values to the default setting, select Reset and press the k  
button.  
C View Grid of COOLPIX Picture Control  
When the zoom control is moved toward g(i) on  
the screen shown in step 1, the current and default  
settings are displayed on a square grid so that you  
can see their relations with the other COOLPIX  
Picture Controls.  
Standard  
The vertical axis indicates the level of contrast, and  
the horizontal axis indicates the level of saturation.  
To return to the setting screen, move the zoom  
control toward g(i) again.  
Back  
Rotate the multi selector to change to other COOLPIX Picture Controls.  
Press the kbutton to display the COOLPIX Picture Control setting screen (step 2  
above).  
For Monochrome, the grid is displayed for contrast only.  
The grid is also displayed when adjusting Contrast or Saturation with manual  
adjustment.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E41  
     
Types of Quick Adjust and Manual Adjust  
Option  
Description  
Adjusts the sharpness, contrast and saturation levels  
automatically.  
Setting to the – side reduces the effect of the selected  
COOLPIX Picture Control, and setting to the + side  
emphasizes its effect.  
1
Quick adjust  
Default setting: 0  
Controls how much outlines are sharpened during shooting.  
The higher the number, the sharper the image, and the lower  
the number, the softer the image.  
Image sharpening  
Select A (auto) for automatic adjustment.  
Default setting: 3 for Standard or Monochrome, 2 for  
Neutral and 4 for Vivid  
Controls the contrast.  
Setting to the – side gives the image a softer appearance,  
and setting to the + side gives it a harder appearance. Select  
lower values to prevent highlights in portrait subjects from  
being “washed out” in direct sunlight, higher values to  
preserve detail in misty landscapes and other low-contrast  
subjects.  
Contrast  
Select A (auto) for automatic adjustment.  
Default setting: 0  
Controls the vividness of colors.  
Setting to the – side reduces the vividness, and setting to the  
+ side increases the vividness.  
2
Saturation  
Select A (auto) for automatic adjustment.  
Default setting: 0  
Simulates the effect of color filters on monochrome  
photographs.  
OFF: Filter effects are not used.  
Y (yellow), O (orange), R (red):  
Enhance contrast. Can be used to tone down the  
brightness of the sky in landscape photographs. The  
contrast is strengthened in the order Y O R.  
G (green):  
Softens skin tones. Suitable for portraits.  
Default setting: OFF  
3
Filter effects  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E42  
           
Option  
3
Description  
Controls the tint used in monochrome photographs from  
B&W (black-and-white), Sepia, and Cyanotype (blue-tinted  
monochrome).  
Pressing the multi selector Iwhen Sepia or Cyanotype is  
selected enables you to select a saturation level. Press JKto  
adjust the saturation.  
Toning  
Default setting: B&W (black-and-white)  
1
Quick adjust is not available in Neutral, Monochrome, Custom 1 and Custom 2.  
The values set manually are disabled if quick adjust is used after manual setting.  
Not displayed for Monochrome.  
2
3
Only displayed for Monochrome.  
B Notes About Image Sharpening  
The effects of Image sharpening cannot be previewed in the monitor during  
shooting. Check the results in playback mode.  
In h(movie custom setting) mode, the image sharpening effect is fixed at A  
(auto).  
B Contrast, Saturation and A (Auto)  
Results for contrast and saturation vary with the exposure, and the position and  
size of the subject in the frame.  
The setting for the COOLPIX Picture Control which has A (auto) selected for either  
Contrast or Saturation is displayed in green in the COOLPIX Picture Control grid.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E43  
 
The Shooting Menu (A, B, Cor DMode)  
Custom Picture Control (COOLPIX Custom Picture  
Control)  
Rotate the mode dial to  
A
,
B,  
C,  
D
,
E,  
F
or NMdbutton MA  
,
B,  
C
or tab ( 13) Custom Picture Control  
D
M
Customize the settings of COOLPIX Picture Control (E41) and register them  
in Custom 1 or Custom 2 of Picture Control in the quick menu.  
Creating COOLPIX Custom Picture Controls  
1
Use the multi selector HIto  
select Edit and save, and press  
the kbutton.  
Custom Picture Control  
Edit and save  
Delete  
Select Delete to delete a registered  
Custom Picture Control.  
2
3
Select the original COOLPIX Picture Control (E41) to be  
edited, and press the kbutton.  
Use HIto highlight the desired setting and use JKto  
select a value (E41).  
The options are the same as those for adjusting the COOLPIX Picture Control.  
Press the kbutton when you finish adjustment.  
To change the values to the default setting, select Reset and press the k  
button.  
4
Select the registration destination  
and press the kbutton.  
Save as  
Custom 1  
Custom 2  
Custom 1 or Custom 2 becomes  
selectable in Picture Control of the quick  
menu.  
To change the adjusted values, select  
Custom 1 or Custom 2 in Picture Control  
or Custom Picture Control.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E44  
       
Metering  
Rotate the mode dial to A, B, C  
,
D
,
E
,
F
or NMdbutton MA,  
B, Cor Dtab (A13) MMetering  
The process of measuring the brightness of the subject to determine the  
exposure is known as “metering.”  
Use this option to set the method of how the camera meters exposure.  
Option  
1
Description  
The camera uses a wide area of the screen for metering.  
Recommended for typical shooting.  
Matrix  
G
q
(default setting)  
The camera meters the entire frame but assigns greatest  
weight to the subject in the center of the frame. The  
classic metering for portraits; it preserves background  
details while letting lighting conditions in the center of  
Center-weighted  
2
the frame determine exposure.  
The camera meters the area shown by the circle in the  
center of the frame. This can be used when the subject  
is much lighter or darker than the background. Ensure  
that the subject is within the area shown by the circle  
1
r
Spot  
2
when shooting.  
1
2
When Focus-coupled metering is set to On and AF area mode (E49) is set to  
Manual, the brightness of the subject is measured by giving higher priority to the  
focus area. See “Focus-coupled Metering” (E58) for more information.  
Can be used with focus lock (A85) to meter off-center subjects.  
B Notes About Metering  
When digital zoom is in effect, Center-weighted or Spot is selected depending  
on the magnification of an enlargement.  
The setting may not be changed when using certain settings of other functions.  
C Display on the Shooting Screen  
When Center-weighted or Spot is selected, the metering range guide (A16) is  
displayed (except when digital zoom is used).  
When Focus-coupled metering is set to On, the metering range guide for  
Spot is not displayed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E45  
   
Continuous Shooting  
Rotate the mode dial to A  
,
B,  
C,  
D,  
E
,
F
or NMdbutton MA,  
B,  
C
or Dtab (A13) MContinuous  
Option  
Single  
(default setting)  
Description  
One image is shot each time the shutter-release button  
is pressed.  
U
While the shutter-release button is held all the way  
down, images are captured continuously.  
The frame rate for continuous shooting is about 8 fps  
and the maximum number of continuous shots is  
about 6 (when image quality is set to Normal and  
image size is set to F 4000×3000).  
k
Continuous H  
While the shutter-release button is held all the way  
down, images are captured continuously.  
The frame rate for continuous shooting is about 4 fps  
and the maximum number of continuous shots is  
about 6 (when image quality is set to Normal and  
image size is set to F 4000×3000).  
l
Continuous M  
Continuous L  
While the shutter-release button is held all the way  
down, images are captured continuously.  
The frame rate for continuous shooting is about 1 fps  
and the maximum number of continuous shots is  
about 30 (when image quality is set to Normal and  
image size is set to F 4000×3000).  
m
While the shutter-release button is held all the way  
down, the camera captures a series of up to 10 images  
and automatically saves the sharpest image.  
Use when shooting a stationary subject in a place where  
flash photography is prohibited and camera shake is  
likely to occur.  
BSS (Best Shot  
Selector)  
D
Each time the shutter-release  
button is pressed all the way, the  
camera captures a series of  
16 images and saves it as a single  
image.  
W
Multi-shot 16  
The frame rate for continuous  
shooting is about 30 fps.  
Image quality is set to Normal and image size is fixed  
at D (2560 × 1920 pixels).  
Digital zoom is not available.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E46  
           
Option  
Description  
Each time the shutter-release button is pressed all the  
way, images are captured at a high speed rate.  
Continuous H:  
120 fps  
The frame rate for continuous shooting is about  
120 fps and the maximum number of continuous  
shots is 60.  
n
Image size is fixed at A (1280 × 960 pixels).  
Each time the shutter-release button is pressed all the  
way, images are captured at a high speed rate.  
Continuous H:  
60 fps  
j
The frame rate for continuous shooting is about 60 fps  
and the maximum number of continuous shots is 60.  
Image size is fixed at A (1280 × 960 pixels).  
Intvl timer  
shooting  
The camera shoots still images automatically at the  
specified interval (E47).  
X
B Notes About Continuous Shooting  
Focus, exposure and white balance are fixed at the values determined with the first  
shot in each series.  
It may take some time to save the images after shooting.  
When ISO sensitivity increases, noise may appear in captured images.  
The frame rate may become slower depending on the image quality, image size,  
memory card type or shooting conditions (such as when recording RAW images).  
When using Multi-shot 16, Continuous H: 120 fps or Continuous H: 60 fps,  
banding or variance in brightness or hue may occur in images that were captured  
under lighting that flashes quickly at high speeds, such as fluorescent, mercury-  
vapor, or sodium-vapor lighting.  
The setting may not be changed when using certain settings of other functions.  
Interval Timer Shooting  
Rotate the mode dial to A  
,
B,  
C,  
D,  
E
,
F
or NMdbutton MA,  
B,  
C
or Dtab (A13) MContinuous  
1
Use the multi selector HIto  
select X Intvl timer shooting, and  
then press the kbutton.  
Continuous  
Continuous H: 60 fps  
Intvl timer shooting  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E47  
     
2
Select the desired interval between  
each shot and press the kbutton.  
Intvl timer shooting  
30 s  
1 min  
5 min  
10 min  
The maximum number of images that can be  
taken during interval timer shooting differs  
according to the selected interval.  
-
-
-
-
30 s: 600 images  
1 min: 300 images  
5 min: 60 images  
10 min: 30 images  
3
4
Press the dbutton to display the shooting screen.  
Press the shutter-release button all  
the way to shoot the first image.  
The shutter is automatically released at the  
specified interval to shoot subsequent  
images.  
1/250  
F5.6  
600  
The monitor turns off and the power-on lamp  
flashes during the intervals between shots  
(when the battery is used).  
5
When the desired number of images have been taken,  
press the shutter-release button.  
Shooting ends.  
Shooting ends automatically when the number of shot images reaches the  
upper limit, or if the internal memory or memory card becomes full.  
B Notes About Interval Timer Shooting  
To prevent the camera from turning off unexpectedly during shooting, use a fully  
charged battery.  
If the AC Adapter EH-5b and the Power Connector EP-5A (available separately)  
(E104) are used, this camera can be powered from an electrical outlet. Do not,  
under any circumstances, use an AC adapter other than the EH-5b or a power  
connector other than the EP-5A. Failure to observe this precaution could result in  
overheating or damage to the camera.  
Do not rotate the mode dial to a different setting while performing interval timer  
shooting.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E48  
AF Area Mode  
Rotate the mode dial to A  
,
B,  
C,  
D,  
E
,
F
,
N
or uMd  
button MA  
,
B,  
C,  
D
or R tab (A13) MAF area mode  
Change the method of how the camera selects the focus area for autofocus.  
The AF area mode can also be selected by pressing the multi selector K(G)  
In A, B, Cor Dmode, the default setting is Center (normal).  
In umode, the default setting is Auto.  
Option  
Description  
When the camera detects a  
human face, it focuses on that  
Detection” (A83) for more  
information.  
a
Face priority  
When framing a composition  
with no human subjects or  
detected faces, AF area mode  
operates in the same way as  
when set to Auto.  
1/250  
F5.6  
1280  
Focus area  
The camera automatically  
selects one or more of the  
9 focus areas containing the  
subject closest to the camera  
when the shutter-release  
button is pressed halfway.  
w
Auto  
1/250  
F5.6  
Focus areas  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E49  
       
Option  
Manual  
Description  
Use the multi selector  
HIJKor rotate it to move  
the focus area to where you  
want to focus.  
To use the multi selector to  
configure the flash mode or  
other settings, press the k  
button. To return to moving  
the focus area, press the k  
button again.  
At an Image size setting  
(E29) of H 3000×3000,  
81 focus areas are available.  
When Metering (E45) is set to Matrix, the camera  
meters by assigning greatest weight to the focus area.  
x
Focus area  
Scope of movable  
focus area  
The camera focuses on the  
area in the center of the  
frame.  
Either the normal or wide size  
can be selected for the focus  
area.  
Center  
(normal)  
Center  
(wide)  
y
u
1/250  
F5.6  
1280  
Focus area  
Use this function to take  
images of moving subjects.  
Register the subject on which  
the camera focuses. The  
Subject  
tracking  
s
*
focus area automatically  
End  
moves to track the subject.  
(E51) for more information.  
1/250  
F5.6  
1280  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E50  
 
Option  
Description  
When the camera detects the  
main subject, it focuses on  
that subject.  
Target  
finding AF  
M
*
1/250  
F5.6  
Focus areas  
*
Not available in special effects mode.  
B Notes About AF Area Mode  
When digital zoom is in effect, the camera focuses on the area in the center of the  
frame regardless of the AF area mode setting.  
The setting may not be changed when using certain settings of other functions.  
Using Subject Tracking  
Rotate the mode dial to A  
,
B,  
C, D, E, For NMdbutton MA  
,
B,  
C
or Dtab (A13) MAF area mode  
1
Use the multi selector HIto  
select s Subject tracking, and  
press the kbutton.  
AF area mode  
Face priority  
Auto  
Manual  
Center (normal)  
Center (wide)  
Subject tracking  
Target finding AF  
Press the dbutton after changing the  
settings and return to the shooting screen.  
The AF area mode can also be selected by  
pressing the multi selector K(G).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E51  
     
2
3
Register a subject.  
Align the subject that you want to track  
with the border in the center of the monitor  
and press the kbutton.  
When the subject is registered, a yellow  
border (focus area) is displayed around that  
subject and the camera begins tracking  
that subject.  
Start  
1/250 F5.6  
1280  
If the subject cannot be registered, the  
border glows red. Change the composition  
and try registering the subject again.  
To cancel subject registration, press the k  
button.  
If the camera can no longer track the  
registered subject, the focus area  
disappears. Register the subject again.  
End  
1/250  
F5.6  
1280  
Press the shutter-release button  
fully to take the picture.  
If the shutter-release button is pressed  
while the focus area is not displayed, the  
camera focuses on the subject in the center  
of the frame.  
1/250  
F5.6  
B Notes About Subject Tracking  
If you perform operations such as zooming while the camera is tracking the  
subject, the registration is canceled.  
Subject tracking may not be possible in certain shooting conditions.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E52  
Autofocus Mode  
Rotate the mode dial to A  
,
B,  
C, D, E, For NMdbutton MA,  
B,  
C
or Dtab (A13) MAutofocus mode  
Select how the camera focuses when shooting still images.  
Option  
Description  
Single AF  
The camera focuses only when the shutter-release  
A
B
(default setting) button is pressed halfway.  
The camera continues focusing even when the  
shutter-release button is not pressed halfway. The  
sound of lens drive movement is heard while the  
camera focuses.  
Full-time AF  
B Notes About Autofocus Mode  
The setting may not be changed when using certain settings of other functions.  
C Autofocus Mode for Movie Recording  
Autofocus mode for movie recording can be set with Autofocus mode (E71) in  
the movie menu or movie custom setting menu.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E53  
   
Flash Exp. Comp.  
Rotate the mode dial to A  
,
B,  
C, D, E, For NMdbutton MA,  
B,  
C
or Dtab (A13) MFlash exp. comp.  
Adjust the flash output.  
Use this option when the flash is too bright or too dark.  
Option  
Description  
The flash output is increased from +0.3 to +2.0 EV, in  
increments of 1/3 EV, to make the main subject of the frame  
appear brighter.  
+0.3 to +2.0  
0.0 (default setting) The flash output is not adjusted.  
The flash output is reduced from –0.3 to –2.0 EV, in  
-0.3 to -2.0  
increments of 1/3 EV, to prevent unwanted highlights or  
reflections.  
B Notes About Flash Exp. Comp.  
When flash exposure compensation has been set on the optional flash unit the  
compensation values on the camera and the Speedlight are added.  
Noise Reduction Filter  
Rotate the mode dial to A  
,
B,  
C, D, E, For NMdbutton MA  
,
B,  
C
or Dtab (A13) MNoise reduction filter  
Set the strength of the noise reduction function that is normally performed  
when saving images.  
Option  
High  
Description  
Performs noise reduction at a level higher than the  
standard strength.  
e
M
l
Normal  
(default setting)  
Performs noise reduction at the standard strength.  
Performs noise reduction at a level lower than the  
standard strength.  
Low  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E54  
       
Built-in ND Filter  
Rotate the mode dial to A  
,
B,  
C, D, E, For NMdbutton MA,  
B,  
C
or Dtab (A13) MBuilt-in ND filter  
When the camera's built-in ND filter is used, the amount of light that enters the  
camera can be reduced to about one-eighth (equivalent to three steps lower in  
terms of the exposure value) while shooting. Use in situations such as when  
overexposure results from the subject being too bright.  
Option  
Description  
The ND filter is used to reduce the light.  
On  
Off (default setting) The ND filter is not used.  
C Effects of the Built-in ND Filter  
Using the filter may enable the shooting of subjects that are too bright without  
overexposing the image. It can also be used in situations such as when you want to  
slow down the shutter speed at a low aperture value.  
For example, at a shutter speed of 1/2000 second with the correct exposure, if the ND  
filter is used to reduce the light in three steps, the speed can be changed to 1/250  
second without changing the aperture value.  
Distortion Control  
Rotate the mode dial to A  
,
B,  
C, D, E, For NMdbutton MA,  
B, Cor Dtab (A13) MDistortion control  
Option  
Description  
The peripheral distortion that occurs due to the  
intrinsic characteristics of lenses is corrected. The size  
of the frame is reduced, as compared to when  
distortion control is not enabled.  
On  
Off (default setting)  
Distortion is not corrected.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E55  
       
Active D-Lighting  
Rotate the mode dial to A  
,
B,  
C, D, E, For NMdbutton MA,  
B, Cor Dtab (A13) MActive D-Lighting  
Details in highlights and shadows are preserved, and the natural contrast that is  
seen with the naked eye is well reproduced in the image taken. This is  
particularly effective for shooting scenes with high contrast, such as brightly lit  
outdoor scenery from a dark room or shaded subjects at a sunny seaside.  
Option  
Description  
High  
Normal  
Low  
a
b
c
Set the effect level.  
Off  
Active D-Lighting is not applied.  
k
(default setting)  
B Notes About Active D-Lighting  
Additional time is required to record images after shooting.  
The setting may not be changed when using certain settings of other functions.  
B Active D-Lighting Versus D-Lighting  
The Active D-Lighting option in the shooting menu reduces exposure before  
shooting to optimize the dynamic range. The D-Lighting (E10) option in the  
playback menu optimizes dynamic range in images captured.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E56  
   
Zoom Memory  
Rotate the mode dial to A  
,
B,  
C, D, E, For NMdbutton MA,  
B, Cor Dtab (A13) MZoom memory  
When the zoom control is moved while pressing the w1 button, the zoom  
position (equivalent to focal length/angle of view in 35mm [135] format) is  
switched to the positions that have been selected by setting the check box to  
on in this menu option. The following settings are available: 28 mm, 35 mm,  
50 mm, 85 mm, 105 mm, 135 mm and 200 mm.  
Select the focal length with the multi selector, and then press the kbutton  
to set the check box to on w or off.  
The default setting is on w for all the check boxes.  
To finish the setting, press the multi selector K.  
The focal length set in the Startup zoom position is automatically set to  
on w.  
B Notes About Zoom Operation  
When more than one focal length has been set, move the zoom control while  
pressing the w1 button to switch to the focal length closest to that before the  
operation. To switch to a different focal length, release the zoom control and then  
move it again.  
Release your finger from the w1 button when using digital zoom.  
Startup Zoom Position  
Rotate the mode dial to A  
,
B,  
C, D, E, For NMdbutton MA,  
B, Cor Dtab (A13) MStartup zoom position  
Set the zoom position (equivalent to focal length/angle of view in 35mm [135]  
format) for when the camera is turned on.  
The following settings are available: 28 mm (default setting), 35 mm, 50 mm,  
85 mm, 105 mm, 135 mm and 200 mm.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E57  
       
M Exposure Preview  
Rotate the mode dial to A  
,
B,  
C, D, E, For NMdbutton MA,  
B, Cor Dtab (A13) MM exposure preview  
Option  
Description  
When the shutter speed and aperture value combination is  
changed in D(manual) mode, the brightness of the  
shooting screen changes accordingly.  
On  
Off  
The brightness of the shooting screen does not change.  
(default setting)  
Focus-coupled Metering  
Rotate the mode dial to A  
,
B,  
C, D, E, For NMdbutton MA,  
B, Cor Dtab (A13) MFocus-coupled metering  
Set whether or not to measure the brightness of the subject by giving higher  
priority to the focus area when AF area mode (E49) is set to Manual.  
Option  
Description  
When Metering (E45) is set to Matrix, the brightness is  
measured with emphasis on the focus area. When Metering  
is set to Spot, the brightness is measured in the focus area.  
On  
(default setting)  
The function for measuring the brightness coupled with the  
selected focus area is disabled.  
Off  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E58  
       
Commander Mode  
Rotate the mode dial to A  
,
B,  
C, D, E, For NMdbutton MA,  
B, Cor Dtab (A13) MCommander mode  
Set how the wirelessly-controlled optional flash unit fires when the flash mode  
(A59) is set to z (commander mode).  
Option  
Description  
Standard flash (default setting):  
The flash unit (Speedlight) fires regardless of how bright the  
subject is.  
Slow sync:  
The flash unit illuminates the main subject and at the same  
time slow shutter speeds are used to capture the  
background.  
Flash mode  
Rear-curtain sync:  
Fill flash fires on the flash unit just before the shutter closes.  
Red-eye reduction:  
If the camera detects “red-eye” while saving an image, it  
reduces the red-eye effect before the image is saved (A61).  
TTL (default setting):  
Fill flash fires with the amount of light emitted by all flash  
units (Speedlights) automatically adjusted according to the  
shooting conditions.  
The compensation value is from –3.0 EV to +3.0 EV.  
Manual:  
Flash control mode  
Fill flash fires after adjusting the amount of light emitted by  
all flash units.  
Select the flash output from w (full flash), S1/2,  
S1/4, S1/8, S1/16, S1/32, S1/64 and S1/128.  
C More Information  
See “Using the Commander Mode“ (E60) for more information.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E59  
     
Using the Commander Mode  
When the flash mode (A59) is set to z (commander mode), you can  
wirelessly control an off-camera optional flash unit.  
Set the group and channel settings for the remote flash unit to “Group A”  
and “3 CH,” respectively.  
Place the flash unit within the range shown in the diagram below.  
Set up the remote flash unit facing the camera to ensure that the light from  
the built-in flash will enter the wireless remote sensor window of the remote  
flash unit. Set up the remote flash unit in a position closer to the subject  
than the camera.  
50° or less  
Approx. 5 m  
(16 ft) or less  
Approx. 3.5 m  
(11.5 ft) or less  
30° or less  
30° or less  
50° or less  
Camera  
(built-in flash)  
Approx. 3.5 m  
(11.5 ft) or less  
The distances shown in the diagram above may vary depending on the  
surrounding environment.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E60  
   
B Notes About Using Commander Mode  
In commander mode, the camera's built-in flash emits low-level flashes in order to  
control the flash unit. Therefore, the built-in flash must always be raised when  
using commander mode. The remote flash unit fires in accordance with the  
Commander mode options (E59) set.  
The built-in flash is not usable when it is set to the commander mode.  
Ensure that light directly from the flash unit or strong reflections do not enter the  
shooting lens of the camera. It may not be possible to obtain the correct exposure  
if such light enters the lens.  
If the light of the remote flash bounces and does not directly light a subject, set the  
Flash control mode of the Commander mode (E59) to Manual in order to  
adjust the flash output.  
Aside from monitor preflashes, the camera's built-in flash emits low-level flashes  
during shooting to match the flash timing of the flash unit. When shooting a  
subject at close distance, these low-level flashes may be captured on the image. To  
prevent such adverse effects, use a lower ISO sensitivity or a larger aperture value  
Refer to the documentation provided with your Speedlight for more information  
on flash unit settings.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E61  
The Playback Menu  
See “Editing Still Images“ (E9) for information about image editing functions.  
a Print Order (Creating a DPOF Print Order)  
Press the cbutton (playback mode) Mdbutton (A12) Ma Print  
order  
If you configure print order settings in advance, you can use them with the  
printing methods listed below.  
Taking the memory card to a digital photo lab that supports DPOF (Digital  
Print Order Format) printing.  
Inserting the memory card into a DPOF-compatible printer’s card slot.  
Connecting the camera to a PictBridge-compatible printer (E20).  
1
Use the multi selector HIto  
select Select images, and press  
the kbutton.  
Print order  
Select images  
Delete print order  
2
Select images (up to 99) and the  
number of copies (up to 9) of each.  
Print selection  
1
1
2
3
Use the multi selector JKor rotate it to  
select images, and use HIto specify the  
number of copies to be printed.  
Images selected for printing are indicated  
by the check mark icon and the numeral  
indicating the number of copies to be  
Back  
printed. If no copies have been specified for images, the selection is  
canceled.  
Move the zoom control toward g(i) to switch to full-frame playback or f  
(h) to switch to thumbnail playback.  
Press the kbutton when setting is complete.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E62  
       
3
Select whether or not to print  
shooting date and shooting  
information.  
Print order  
Done  
Select Date and press the kbutton to  
print the shooting date on all images.  
Select Info and press the kbutton to print  
the shutter speed and aperture value on all  
images.  
Date  
Info  
Lastly, select Done and press the kbutton to complete the print order.  
B Notes About Printing Shooting Date and Shooting Information  
Some printers may not be able to print the shooting date and shooting  
information.  
Shooting information is not printed when the camera is connected to a printer.  
The Date and Info settings are reset each time the Print order option is  
displayed.  
The date printed is that saved when the image was  
captured.  
For images taken with the Print date (E77)  
option enabled, only the date and time imprinted  
at the time of shooting are printed, even if the  
Print order date option is enabled for the images.  
15/11//2013  
B Notes About Print Order  
RAW (NRW) images cannot be set for print order. Create a JPEG image using RAW  
(NRW) processing (E15), and then set the JPEG image for print order.  
C Canceling Existing Print Order  
Select Delete print order in step 1 of “Print Order (Creating a DPOF Print Order)”  
(E62).  
C More Information  
See “Printing Images of Size 1:1” (E29) for more information.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E63  
   
b Slide Show  
Press the cbutton (playback mode) Mdbutton (A12) Mb Slide  
show  
Play back images one by one in an automated “slide show.” When movie files  
(A97) are played back in the slide show, only the first frame of each movie is  
displayed.  
1
2
Use the multi selector HIto  
select Start and press the k  
button.  
Slide show  
Pause  
The slide show begins.  
Start  
Frame intvl  
Loop  
To change the interval between images,  
select Frame intvl, press the kbutton,  
and specify the desired interval time before  
selecting Start.  
3s  
To repeat the slide show automatically, select Loop and press the kbutton  
before selecting Start.  
The maximum playback time is up to about 30 minutes even if Loop is  
enabled.  
Select End or Restart.  
The screen shown on the right is displayed  
after the slide show ends or is paused. To  
exit the show, select G and then press the  
kbutton. To resume the slide show, select  
F and then press the kbutton.  
Operations During Playback  
Use JKto display the previous/next image. Press and hold to rewind/fast  
forward.  
Press the kbutton to pause or end the slide show.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E64  
   
c Delete  
Press the cbutton (playback mode) Mdbutton (A12) Mc Delete  
Delete selected images, or all images at one time.  
See “Using the Screen for Selecting Images” (A90) for more information.  
Option  
Description  
On the image selection screen, select the images for deletion.  
When images where RAW (NRW) and JPEG images are  
recorded at the same time are selected, the RAW (NRW) and  
JPEG images are deleted at the same time.  
When the key picture of a sequence is selected, all images  
in the sequence are deleted.  
Erase selected  
images  
Delete all images.  
This option is not displayed when images in a sequence  
are displayed in full-frame playback mode.  
All images  
This option is displayed when images in a sequence are  
displayed in full-frame playback mode.  
Entire sequence  
Delete all images in the displayed sequence.  
Only RAW (NRW) images are displayed on the image selection  
screen. Select and delete images.  
Erase selected  
NRW images  
For images where RAW (NRW) and JPEG images are  
recorded at the same time, only RAW (NRW) images are  
deleted.  
Only JPEG images are displayed on the image selection  
screen. Select and delete images.  
Erase selected  
JPEG images  
For images where RAW (NRW) and JPEG images are  
recorded at the same time, only JPEG images are deleted.  
B Notes About Deletion  
Deleted images cannot be recovered. Transfer important images to a computer  
before deleting them.  
Images marked with the sicon are protected and cannot be deleted (E66).  
I is displayed on the image selection screen for images where RAW (NRW) and  
JPEG images are recorded at the same time.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E65  
   
d Protect  
Press the cbutton (playback mode) Mdbutton (A12) Md Protect  
The camera protects selected images from accidental deletion.  
Select images to protect or cancel protection for previously protected images  
from the image selection screen (A90).  
Note that formatting the camera’s internal memory or the memory card  
(E85) permanently deletes protected files.  
f Rotate Image  
Press the cbutton (playback mode) Mdbutton (A12) Mf Rotate  
image  
Specify the orientation in which saved images are displayed during playback.  
Still images can be rotated 90 degrees clockwise or 90 degrees  
counterclockwise.  
Images that were recorded in the “tall” orientation can be rotated up to 180  
degrees in either direction.  
Select an image from the image selection screen (A90). When the Rotate  
image screen is displayed, use the multi selector JKor rotate it to rotate the  
image 90 degrees.  
Rotate image  
Rotate image  
Rotate image  
Back  
Rotate  
Back  
Rotate  
Back  
Rotate  
Rotate 90 degrees  
counterclockwise  
Rotate 90 degrees  
clockwise  
Press the kbutton to finalize display orientation, and save orientation  
information with the image.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E66  
       
E Voice Memo  
Press the cbutton (playback mode) Mselect an image Mdbutton  
(A12) ME Voice memo  
Voice memos can be recorded and attached to images.  
Recording Voice Memos  
Press and hold the kbutton to record (up to  
about 20 seconds).  
Do not touch the microphone.  
During recording, oand pflash in the  
monitor.  
17s  
The voice memo playback screen is displayed  
after recording ends. Press the kbutton to  
play back the voice memo.  
Delete the current voice memo before recording a new voice memo.  
pis displayed for images with a voice memo when in full-frame playback  
mode.  
Press the multi selector Jbefore or after recording a voice memo to return  
to the playback menu.  
Playing Voice Memos  
Select an image with pdisplayed before  
pressing the dbutton.  
Press the kbutton to play the voice memo.  
Press the button again to stop playback.  
Move the zoom control during playback to  
adjust playback volume.  
Press Jbefore or after playing a voice memo  
to return to the playback menu.  
Back  
12s  
Deleting Voice Memos  
Press the lbutton on the voice memo playback  
screen. Use HIto select Yes and press the k  
button.  
File will be deleted. OK?  
To delete a voice memo for a protected  
image, the Protect setting must first be  
disabled.  
Yes  
No  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E67  
         
h Copy (Copy Between Internal Memory and  
Memory Card)  
Press the cbutton (playback mode) Mdbutton (A12) Mh Copy  
Copy images or movies between the internal memory and a memory card.  
1
2
Use the multi selector HIto  
select a destination option to  
which images are copied and press  
the kbutton.  
Copy  
Camera to card  
Card to camera  
Select a copy option and press the  
kbutton.  
Camera to card  
Selected images  
All images  
If you choose the Selected images option,  
use the image selection screen to specify  
images (A90).  
B Notes About Copying Images  
Only files in formats that this camera can record can be copied.  
When images saved with an Image quality (E27) setting of RAW (NRW) + Fine  
or RAW (NRW) + Normal are selected, the RAW (NRW) and JPEG images are  
copied at the same time.  
Operation is not guaranteed with images captured with another make of camera or  
that have been modified on a computer.  
The Print order (E62) settings configured for images are not copied.  
C Notes About Copying Images in a Sequence  
If you select a key picture of a sequence in Selected images, all images in the  
sequence are copied.  
If you press the dbutton while images in a sequence are displayed, only the  
Card to camera copy option is available. All images in the sequence are copied if  
you select Current sequence.  
C Copying to a Memory Card That Contains No Images  
When the camera is switched to playback mode, Memory contains no images. is  
displayed. Press the dbutton to select Copy.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E68  
     
C Sequence Display Options  
Press the cbutton (playback mode) Mdbutton (A12) MC  
Sequence display options  
Select the method used to display images in the sequence (E7).  
Option  
Description  
Displays each image in a sequence individually. g is  
displayed on the playback screen.  
Individual pictures  
Key picture only  
(default setting)  
Displays only the key picture for images in a sequence.  
Settings are applied to all sequences, and the setting is saved in the camera’s  
memory even if the camera is turned off.  
x Choose Key Picture  
Press the cbutton (playback mode) Mdisplay a sequence for which you  
want to change the key picture Mdbutton (A12) Mx Choose key  
picture  
Specify a different image in the sequence as the key picture.  
When the key picture selection screen is displayed, select an image (A90).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E69  
       
The Movie and Movie Custom Setting  
Menus  
Shooting Mode (Movie Custom Setting Only)  
Rotate the mode dial to hMdbutton MZ (movie custom setting)  
tab (A96) MShooting mode  
Set the standard shooting mode during h(movie custom setting) mode.  
Option  
Description  
Use this mode to shoot subjects clearly with both  
the foreground and background in focus or to blur  
the subject's background intentionally (A51).  
Aperture-priority auto  
(default setting)  
C
D
Use this mode to control the exposure according to  
shooting requirements (A51).  
Manual  
Use this mode to apply the effects to images during  
shooting. Select one of the following:  
Painting (default setting), Cross process, Soft,  
Nostalgic sepia, High key, Low key and  
Selective color  
R
Special effects  
See A46 for more information on characteristics  
of each special effect.  
C Notes About Shooting Mode  
The setting may not be changed when using certain settings of other functions.  
Custom Picture Control (Movie Custom Setting  
Only)  
Rotate the mode dial to hMdbutton MZ (movie custom setting)  
tab (A96) MCustom Picture Control  
To set Custom Picture Control, see “Custom Picture Control (COOLPIX Custom  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E70  
         
Autofocus Mode  
Rotate the mode dial to eor hMdbutton MD (movie) or Z  
(movie custom setting) tab (A96) MAutofocus mode  
Set how the camera focuses when recording movies.  
Option  
Description  
Focus is locked when movie recording starts. Select this  
option when the distance between the camera and the  
subject will remain fairly consistent.  
Single AF  
(default setting)  
A
B
The camera focuses continuously.  
Select this option when the distance between the  
camera and subject will change significantly during  
recording. The sound of the camera focusing may be  
heard in the recorded movie. Use of Single AF is  
recommended to prevent the sound of the camera  
focusing from interfering with recording.  
Full-time AF  
C Notes About Autofocus Mode  
When an HS movie option is selected in Movie options, the setting is fixed at  
Single AF.  
The setting may not be changed when using certain settings of other functions.  
Built-in ND Filter (Movie Custom Setting Only)  
Rotate the mode dial to hMdbutton MZ (movie custom setting)  
tab (A96) MBuilt-in ND filter  
To set built-in ND filter, see “Built-in ND Filter“ (E55).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E71  
     
Wind Noise Reduction  
Rotate the mode dial to eor hMdbutton MD (movie) or Z  
(movie custom setting) tab (A96) MWind noise reduction  
Option  
On  
Description  
Reduces the sound produced when wind passes over  
the microphone. Other sounds may become difficult to  
hear during playback.  
Y
Off  
k
Wind noise reduction is not enabled.  
(default setting)  
The Setup Menu  
Welcome Screen  
Press the dbutton Mz tab (A13) MWelcome screen  
Configure the welcome screen that is displayed when you turn on the camera.  
Option  
Description  
None  
(default setting)  
Does not display the welcome screen.  
COOLPIX  
Displays a welcome screen with the COOLPIX logo.  
Displays an image selected for the welcome screen.  
The image selection screen is displayed. Select an image  
(A90) and press the kbutton.  
Because a copy of the selected image is saved in the  
camera, it will be displayed when the camera is turned on,  
even if the original image is deleted.  
Select an image  
An image cannot be selected if its aspect ratio is different  
from that of the screen, or if the image size is extremely  
small after the small picture or crop function is applied.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E72  
           
Time Zone and Date  
Press the dbutton Mz tab (A13) MTime zone and date  
Set the camera clock.  
Option  
Description  
Select an item: Press the multi  
selector JK(changes  
between D, M, Y, hour, and  
minute).  
Edit the date and time: Press  
HI. Date and time can also  
be changed by rotating the  
multi selector or main  
command dial.  
Date and time  
D
M
Y
15  
11  
2013  
15  
10  
Date and time  
Edit  
Apply the setting: Select the minute setting and press the k  
button or K.  
Select Year/Month/Day, Month/Day/Year, or Day/Month/  
Date format  
Time zone  
Year.  
Set time zone and daylight saving time.  
When Travel destination (x) is set after having set the  
home time zone (w), the time difference between the travel  
destination and the home time zone is automatically  
calculated, and the date and time are saved for the selected  
region.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E73  
   
Setting the Time Zone  
1
2
3
4
Use the multi selector HIto  
select Time zone and press the k  
button.  
Time zone and date  
15/11/2013 15:30  
London, Casablanca  
Date and time  
Date format  
Time zone  
Select w Home time zone or  
x Travel destination and press  
the kbutton.  
Time zone  
Tokyo, Seoul  
16/11/2013 0:30  
Home time zone  
Travel destination  
The date and time displayed in the monitor  
changes depending on whether the home  
time zone or travel destination is selected.  
Press K.  
Time zone  
Tokyo, Seoul  
16/11/2013 0:30  
Home time zone  
Travel destination  
Time difference  
Use JKto select the time zone.  
The time difference between home and  
the travel destination is displayed.  
Press Hto enable daylight saving time  
function, and W is displayed. Press Ito  
disable the daylight saving time function.  
Press the kbutton to apply the time zone.  
If the correct time is not displayed for the  
home or travel destination time zone  
setting, set the appropriate time in Date  
and time.  
10:30  
-5:00  
New York  
Toronto  
Lima  
Back  
Time zone  
New York, Toronto, Lima  
15/11/2013 10:30  
Home time zone  
Travel destination  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E74  
   
Monitor Settings  
Press the dbutton Mz tab (A13) MMonitor settings  
Option  
Description  
On (default setting): The captured image is displayed in the  
monitor immediately after shooting and the monitor display  
returns to the shooting screen.  
Image review  
Off: The captured image is not displayed immediately after  
shooting.  
Tone level information: Tone level information (A11) is  
displayed in the monitor immediately after shooting.  
Set the monitor brightness to one of 6 levels.  
Default setting: 3  
u is suitable when very bright light under the open sky  
makes the monitor difficult to see. Colors may appear  
different from the actual image.  
Brightness  
Cannot be set when the viewfinder is used.  
Set the display options displayed in the monitor (A11)  
during shooting. The following display options can be set for  
each of Show info and Hide info.  
X Virtual horizon: Displays the virtual horizon for checking  
whether the camera is horizontal. When the camera is  
horizontal or vertical, the mark on the virtual horizon display  
turns green.  
Y Histograms: Displays a graph that shows the brightness  
distribution in the image (A16).  
Photo info  
Z Framing grid: Displays a boxed guide for framing.  
Default setting: All hidden (off)  
To select show or hide, select an option with the multi  
selector, and then press the kbutton to turn the check  
box on w or off.  
After finishing the setting, select Confirm and press the k  
button.  
Virtual horizon  
display  
Select Circle (default setting) or Bars when the virtual horizon  
is set to be displayed in Photo info (A16).  
Select which of the monitor and viewfinder is used to display  
the playback screen or menu screen when the cbutton or  
dbutton is pressed during shooting.  
Monitor priority: Switches to the monitor when the  
viewfinder has been used for shooting.  
Playback/menus  
Monitor or viewfinder (default setting): Either the monitor  
or viewfinder which had been selected before the cbutton  
or dbutton was pressed is continuously used.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E75  
                 
B Notes About Photo Info  
The histogram is not displayed during movie recording. The virtual horizon is  
displayed only before recording is started.  
The virtual horizon is not displayed in the following scene modes.  
Scene auto selector, Portrait, Night portrait, Food, Panorama and Pet  
portrait  
The virtual horizon and histogram may not be displayed when shooting with some  
of the settings of Smile timer or AF area mode. See A80 for more information.  
In shooting modes E, Fand N, set Photo info in the specialized menus for  
E, Fand N(A73, 75).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E76  
Print Date (Imprinting Date and Time on Images)  
Press the dbutton Mz tab (A13) MPrint date  
The shooting date and time can be imprinted on  
the images when shooting, allowing the  
information to be printed even from printers that  
do not support date printing (E63).  
15/11//2013  
Option  
Date  
Date and time  
Description  
Date is imprinted on images.  
f
S
Date and time are imprinted on images.  
k Off (default setting)  
Date and time are not imprinted on images.  
B Notes About Print Date  
Imprinted dates form a permanent part of image data and cannot be deleted. The  
date and time cannot be imprinted on images after they have been captured.  
The date and time cannot be imprinted in the following situations.  
-
-
When the scene mode is set to Easy panorama or Panorama assist  
When Image quality (E27) is set to RAW (NRW), RAW (NRW) + Fine or  
RAW (NRW) + Normal  
-
-
When Continuous H: 120 fps or Continuous H: 60 fps is selected for  
Continuous (E46)  
When shooting movies  
The imprinted date and time may be difficult to read when using a small image  
size.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E77  
   
Self-timer: After Release  
Press the dbutton Mz tab (A13) MSelf-timer: after release  
Set whether or not to cancel the self-timer setting after shooting with self-timer (  
A62).  
Option  
Description  
Cancels the self-timer setting after shooting.  
When the self-timer remote control (10s/2s/1s) has  
been set (E106), the setting is changed to the  
quick-response remote after shooting.  
When smile timer (A63) has been set, the setting is  
not canceled.  
Exit self-timer mode  
(default setting)  
Shooting is continued without canceling the self-timer  
setting.  
Stay in self-timer mode  
The setting is canceled when the camera is turned  
off.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E78  
   
Vibration Reduction  
Press the dbutton Mz tab (A13) MVibration reduction  
Set to reduce the effects of camera shake while shooting.  
Set Vibration reduction to Off when using a tripod to stabilize the camera  
during shooting.  
Option  
Description  
Vibration reduction is enabled.  
The camera automatically detects the panning  
direction and only compensates for vibration caused  
by camera shake.  
When the camera is panned horizontally, for example,  
vibration reduction only reduces vertical shake. If the  
camera is panned vertically, vibration reduction only  
compensates for horizontal shake.  
On  
g
(default setting)  
k
Off  
Vibration reduction is disabled.  
B Notes About Vibration Reduction  
After turning on the camera or after switching from playback mode to shooting  
mode, wait for the shooting mode screen to be displayed completely before  
taking images.  
Images displayed in the camera monitor immediately after shooting may be  
displayed blurry.  
Vibration reduction may be unable to completely eliminate the effects of camera  
shake in some situations.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E79  
   
AF Assist  
Press the dbutton Mz tab (A13) MAF assist  
Enable or disable the AF-assist illuminator which assists autofocus operation.  
Option  
Description  
The AF-assist illuminator automatically lights up when  
the subject is dimly lit. The illuminator has a range of  
about 4.0 m (13 ft) at the maximum wide-angle  
position and about 2.0 m (6 ft 6 in.) at the maximum  
telephoto position.  
Auto  
(default setting)  
Note that for some scene modes or focus areas, the  
AF-assist illuminator may not light.  
Off  
The AF-assist illuminator does not light.  
B Notes About the AF-assist Illuminator  
In shooting modes E, Fand N, set AF assist in the specialized menu for E, F  
ISO Sensitivity Step Value  
Press the dbutton Mz tab (A13) MISO sensitivity step value  
Set the step value of the sensitivity to be set for ISO sensitivity (E33) of the  
quick menu.  
Option  
Description  
The ISO sensitivity step value is set to 1 step.  
1 step  
(default setting)  
80, 100, 200, 400, 800, 1600, 3200, Hi 1  
(equivalent to ISO 6400)  
The ISO sensitivity step value is set to 1/3 step.  
80, 100, 125, 160, 200, 250, 320, 400, 500, 640,  
800, 1000, 1250, 1600, 2000, 2500, 3200, Hi 1  
(equivalent to ISO 6400)  
1/3 step  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E80  
       
Digital Zoom  
Press the dbutton Mz tab (A13) MDigital zoom  
Option  
Description  
Digital zoom is enabled.  
On  
(default setting)  
The zoom ratio is limited within a range in which the  
image quality does not deteriorate (up to the V  
position of the zoom indicator) (A33).  
Digital zoom cannot be used in the following  
situations.  
-
-
When Image size is F 4000×3000,  
E 3264×2448, I 3984×2656, u 3968×2232  
or H 3000×3000  
When the Movie options setting is d  
1080P/30p/o 1080P/25p, e 1080/  
30p/p 1080/25p, h/u HS 480/4×,  
i/w HS 720/2× or j/x HS 1080/  
0.5×  
Crop  
-
When Continuous is set to Continuous H: 120  
fps or Continuous H: 60 fps  
Off  
Digital zoom is disabled.  
B Notes About Digital Zoom  
Digital zoom cannot be used in the following situations.  
- When Scene auto selector, Portrait, Night portrait, Easy panorama in  
Panorama or Pet portrait is selected in scene mode  
- When Zoom exposure is selected in special effects mode  
Digital zoom cannot be used when using certain settings of other functions.  
When digital zoom is in effect, Metering (E45) is set to Center-weighted or  
Spot depending on the magnification of an enlargement.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E81  
   
Zoom Speed  
Press the dbutton Mz tab (A13) MZoom speed  
Set the zoom operation speed. Slow down the zoom speed to minimize the  
recording of the zoom operating noise during movie recording.  
Option  
Description  
During still image shooting, the zoom operates at the  
Normal speed. During movie recording, the zoom  
operates at a lower speed than Normal.  
Auto  
k
(default setting)  
Normal  
During both still image shooting and movie recording,  
the zoom operates at the normal speed. Rotating the  
zoom control all the way in either direction adjusts the  
zoom quickly, while moving the control partially  
adjusts the zoom slowly.  
z
y
During both still image shooting and movie recording,  
the zoom operates at a lower speed than Normal.  
Quiet  
Fixed Aperture  
Press the dbutton Mz tab (A13) MFixed aperture  
Option  
Description  
In Cor Dshooting mode, zooming can be performed  
with minimum changes in the aperture value.  
On  
Off  
When the f-number exceeds the aperture control  
range at a new zoom position, the aperture value is  
not fixed.  
The aperture value is not fixed.  
(default setting)  
C More Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E82  
       
Sound Settings  
Press the dbutton Mz tab (A13) MSound settings  
Option  
Description  
When On (default setting) is selected, the camera  
produces one beep when operations are performed,  
two beeps when focus is acquired on the subject, and  
three beeps when an error occurs. The start-up sound  
is also produced.  
Button sound  
Sounds are disabled when using Pet portrait scene  
mode.  
The start-up sound is not produced when Welcome  
screen is set to None.  
When On (default setting) is selected, the shutter  
sound is produced when the shutter is released.  
The shutter sound is not produced when using  
continuous shooting mode, when recording  
movies, or when using Pet portrait scene mode.  
Shutter sound  
Record Orientation  
Press the dbutton Mz tab (A13) MRecord orientation  
Set whether or not to record the “tall” orientation data on the images that are  
shot with the camera held in “tall” orientation.  
Option  
Description  
The “tall” orientation data is recorded on the images  
when they are shot.  
When Rotate tall (E84) is set to On, the images are  
displayed in “tall” orientation during playback.  
Auto  
(default setting)  
Off  
The “tall” orientation data is not recorded.  
The orientation data can be changed after shooting using Rotate image in  
the playback menu (E66).  
B Notes About Recording the “Tall” Orientation Data  
In Continuous or Auto bracketing mode, all images are recorded with the same  
orientation data as the first image.  
Correct orientation data may not be obtained for images recorded with the  
camera facing up or down.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E83  
           
Rotate Tall  
Press the dbutton Mz tab (A13) MRotate tall  
Option  
Description  
The images are rotated when the camera is turned in “tall” or  
landscape orientation during playback. The images on which  
the “tall” orientation data is recorded are displayed in “tall”  
orientation.  
On  
(default setting)  
15/11/2013 15:30  
0004.JPG  
4
132  
Off  
The images are not rotated.  
Auto Off  
Press the dbutton Mz tab (A13) MAuto off  
Set the amount of time that elapses before the camera enters standby mode  
You can select 30 s, 1 min (default setting), 5 min, or 30 min.  
C Notes About Auto Off  
The time that passes before the camera enters standby mode is fixed in the  
following situations:  
-
-
When a menu is displayed: 3 minutes (when auto off is set to 30 s or 1 min)  
When the AC Adapter EH-5b is connected: 30 minutes  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E84  
       
Format Memory/Format Card  
Press the dbutton Mz tab (A13) MFormat memory/Format card  
Use this option to format the internal memory or a memory card.  
Formatting the internal memory or memory cards permanently deletes  
all data. Data that has been deleted cannot be recovered. Make sure to  
transfer important images to a computer before formatting.  
Do not turn the camera off or open the battery-chamber/memory card slot cover  
during formatting.  
Formatting the Internal Memory  
Remove the memory card from the camera. The  
Format memory option is displayed in the  
setup menu.  
Format memory  
All images will  
be deleted! OK?  
Format  
No  
Formatting Memory Cards  
Insert a memory card in the camera. The  
Format card option is displayed in the setup  
menu.  
Format card  
All images will  
be deleted! OK?  
Format  
No  
Language  
Press the dbutton Mz tab (A13) MLanguage  
Select a language for display of camera menus and messages.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E85  
       
TV Settings  
Press the dbutton Mz tab (A13) MTV settings  
Adjust settings for connection to a TV.  
Option  
Description  
Select from NTSC and PAL.  
Both NTSC and PAL are standards for analog color  
television broadcasting.  
Video mode  
The available frame rates in Movie options (E30)  
change depending on the setting of the video  
mode.  
Select a resolution for HDMI output. When Auto  
(default setting) is selected, the option best suited to  
the TV to which the camera is connected is  
HDMI  
automatically selected from 480p, 720p, or 1080i.  
When On (default setting) is selected, the HDMI-CEC-  
compatible TV’s remote control can be used to control  
the camera during playback (E19).  
HDMI device control  
C HDMI and HDMI-CEC  
HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is a multimedia interface.  
HDMI-CEC (HDMI-Consumer Electronics Control) allows compatible devices to inter-  
operate.  
External Mic Sensitivity  
Press the dbutton Mz tab (A13) MExternal mic sensitivity  
Set the external microphone sensitivity to Auto (default setting), High,  
Medium or Low when recording movies.  
When the microphone sensitivity is set to Auto, the camera automatically  
adjusts the microphone sensitivity.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E86  
           
Customize Command Dials  
Press the dbutton Mz tab (A13) MCustomize command dials  
Swap the function of the main command dial for that of the sub-command dial  
when the exposure is set (A49).  
This option is available only when shooting mode is set to A, B, C, D, E,  
For Nmode or during movie custom setting mode (when Shooting  
mode is set to Aperture-priority auto or Manual).  
Option  
Description  
In Amode, set the flexible program using the main  
command dial.  
In B, Cor Dmode, set the shutter speed using the  
main command dial and set the aperture value using  
the sub-command dial.  
No swap  
(default setting)  
In Amode, set the flexible program using the sub-  
command dial.  
Swap main and sub  
In B, Cor Dmode, set the shutter speed using the  
sub-command dial and set the aperture value using  
the main command dial.  
Command Dial Rotation  
Press the dbutton Mz tab (A13) MCommand dial rotation  
Change the direction of operation when the command dial is rotated during  
shooting.  
This option is available only when shooting mode is set to A, B, C, D, E,  
For Nmode or during movie custom setting mode (when Shooting  
mode is set to Aperture-priority auto or Manual).  
Option  
Description  
For example, in Bmode, the shutter speed is set to the  
low speed side if the main command dial is rotated  
counterclockwise.  
Standard rotation  
(default setting)  
For example, in Bmode, the shutter speed is set to the  
high speed side if the main command dial is rotated  
counterclockwise.  
Reverse rotation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E87  
       
Multi Selector Right Press  
Press the dbutton Mz tab (A13) MMulti selector right press  
Set the function to be performed when the multi selector Kis pressed.  
Option  
AF area mode  
(default setting)  
Description  
The AF area mode (E49) setting is displayed when the  
multi selector Kis pressed.  
Off  
The setting is not displayed.  
Delete Button Options  
Press the dbutton Mz tab (A13) MDelete button options  
Option  
Description  
Press the lbutton once more to delete an image while  
the deletion confirmation message is displayed (A37).  
Press twice to delete  
Even if the lbutton is pressed again while the  
deletion confirmation message is displayed, the image  
is not deleted.  
Disable second press  
(default setting)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E88  
       
AE/AF Lock Button  
Press the dbutton Mz tab (A13) MAE/AF lock button  
Set the function to be performed when the AE-L/AF-L button (A4) is pressed  
while shooting.  
Option  
AE/AF lock  
(default setting)  
Description  
Locks both the focus and exposure while the AE-L/AF-L  
button is pressed.  
Locks only the exposure while the AE-L/AF-L button is  
pressed.  
AE lock only  
Locks the exposure when the AE-L/AF-L button is  
pressed. To cancel the lock, press the button again.  
AE lock (Hold)  
AF lock only  
Locks only the focus while the AE-L/AF-L button is  
pressed.  
operation when the AE-L/AF-L button is pressed during movie recording.  
B Notes About AE/AF Lock Button Setting  
When the scene mode is Scene auto selector, AF-L (focus locking) using the AE-  
L/AF-L button is disabled. When the scene mode is Fireworks show, the AE-L/AF-  
L button cannot be used.  
AE-L (exposure locking) cannot be used when the shooting mode is set to D.  
AF-L (focus locking) cannot be used when focus mode (A64) is set to E (manual  
focus).  
C More Information  
See “Focus Lock” (A85) for more information.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E89  
   
Fn1 + Shutter Button  
Press the dbutton Mz tab (A13) MFn1 + shutter button  
Set the function to be performed when the shutter-release button is pressed  
while pressing the w1 (function 1) button (A4) during shooting.  
This option is available when A, B, C, D, E, For Nis selected for  
shooting mode.  
Option  
Description  
Off  
Shoots without changing the setting.  
(default setting)  
Changes the image quality setting for images to be  
shot.  
When Fine or Normal is set, the setting is changed to  
RAW (NRW)/NORMAL  
RAW (NRW), and when RAW (NRW) is set, it is  
(Image quality) (E27) changed to Normal.  
The image size is F 4000×3000.  
Shoots without changing the setting when RAW  
(NRW) + Fine or RAW (NRW) + Normal is set.  
ISO sensitivity (E33)  
Shoots with ISO sensitivity set to Auto.  
Shoots with White balance set to Auto (normal).  
White balance (E35)  
Cannot be used when Picture Control is set to  
Monochrome.  
Picture Control (E40) Shoots with COOLPIX Picture Control set to Standard.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E90  
   
Fn1 + Command Dial/Fn1 + Selector Dial  
Press the d button M z tab (A13) M Fn1 + command dial/Fn1 +  
selector dial  
Set the function to be performed when the command dial or multi selector is  
rotated while pressing the w1 (function 1) button during shooting.  
Rotating either the main command dial or sub-command dial enables the  
command dial operation.  
This option is available when the shooting mode is A, B, C, D, E, F, N  
or movie custom setting mode.  
Option  
Description  
Off  
No function is set. Operation will be disabled.  
(default setting)  
Metering (E45)  
Continuous (E46)  
Change the setting for metering.  
Change the settings for continuous shooting.  
Flash exp. comp.  
(E54)  
Change the setting for Flash exp. comp.  
Change the setting for Active D-Lighting.  
Active D-Lighting  
(E56)  
ISO sensitivity (E33)  
Change the setting for ISO sensitivity.  
Change the setting for white balance.  
White balance (E35)  
Preset manual measurement and fine adjustment of  
white balance are not available.  
Change the setting for COOLPIX Picture Control.  
Quick adjust and manual adjust are not available.  
Picture Control (E40)  
Vibration reduction  
(E79)  
Change the setting for vibration reduction.  
B Notes About Fn1 + Command Dial/Fn1 + Selector Dial  
Operation is disabled when AE or AF is locked.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E91  
   
Fn1 Guide Display  
Press the dbutton Mz tab (A13) MFn1 guide display  
Option  
Description  
When the w1 (function 1) button is pressed during  
shooting, guides for the functions assigned to Fn1 +  
shutter button (E90), Fn1 + command dial and  
Fn1 + selector dial (E91) are displayed in the  
monitor.  
On  
(default setting)  
In the shooting modes or settings during which the  
w1 button cannot be used, X will be displayed.  
Even if the w1 button is pressed, guides are not  
displayed.  
Off  
Fn2 Button  
Press the dbutton Mz tab (A13) MFn2 button  
Set the function to be performed when the w2 button (A5) is pressed.  
Option  
Description  
Off  
No function is set. Operation will be disabled.  
Show/hide info  
(default setting)  
Switches the information displayed in the monitor  
during shooting and playback (A11).  
Virtual horizon,  
View/hide histograms,  
View/hide framing grid  
Shows or hides the virtual horizon, histogram or  
framing grid (E75) in the monitor during shooting.  
Change the built-in ND filter (E55) setting during  
shooting.  
Built-in ND filter  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E92  
       
Customize My Menu  
Press the dbutton Mz tab (A13) MCustomize My Menu  
Register frequently used menu items in My  
Menu (up to 5 items). The settings of the menu  
Custom Picture Control  
items registered in My Menu can be checked  
and changed in the Itab of the quick  
menu(only when the shooting mode is set to A,  
B, C, D, E, For N).  
Metering  
Continuous  
AF area mode  
Autofocus mode  
Single  
The following items can be registered.  
Custom Picture Control (E44)  
Metering (E45)  
Active D-Lighting (E56)  
Vibration reduction (E79)  
Digital zoom (E81)  
Continuous (E46)  
AF area mode (E49)  
Format memory/Format card (E85)  
Built-in ND filter (E55)  
Eye-Fi upload (E96)  
Autofocus mode (E53)  
Flash exp. comp. (E54)  
Noise reduction filter (E54)  
Distortion control (E55)  
None (delete)*  
*
Select to remove an item from My Menu.  
Registering into My Menu  
1
Use the multi selector HIto  
select the menu item and press the  
kbutton.  
Customize My Menu  
Custom Picture Control  
Metering  
Continuous  
AF area mode  
Autofocus mode  
2
Select the menu item to be  
registered and press the k  
button.  
Customize My Menu : 1  
Custom Picture Control  
Metering  
Continuous  
AF area mode  
To finish the setting, press J.  
Autofocus mode  
Flash exp. comp.  
Noise reduction filter  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E93  
   
Reset File Numbering  
Press the dbutton Mz tab (A13) MReset file numbering  
When Yes is selected, the sequential numbering of file numbers is reset  
(E103). After resetting, a new folder is created and the file number for the next  
image taken starts with “0001.”  
B Notes About Reset File Numbering  
Reset file numbering cannot be applied when the folder number reaches 999 and  
there are images in the folder. Insert a new memory card, or format the internal  
memory/memory card (E85).  
C Folders for Storing Files  
Still images, movies and voice memos shot or recorded with this camera are saved in  
folders of the internal memory/memory card.  
Sequential numbers are added to folder names in ascending order, starting with  
“100” and ending with “999” (the folder names are not displayed on the camera).  
A new folder is created in the following situations.  
- When the number of files in a folder reaches 200  
- When a file in a folder is numbered “9999”  
- When Reset file numbering is performed  
A new folder is created each time a series of images are captured using panorama  
assist or interval timer shooting, and the images are saved in that folder with file  
numbers starting with “0001.”  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E94  
   
Accessory Terminal  
Press the dbutton Mz tab (A13) MAccessory terminal  
Set this option when the optional Wireless Remote Controller WR-R10 or GPS  
unit (E105) is attached to the accessory terminal (A2).  
Option  
Power supply  
Description  
When set to On (default setting), the WR-R10 or GPS  
unit works.  
When the GPS unit is attached, signals from the GPS  
satellites are used to set the date and time of the  
camera's internal clock (only when Power supply is  
set to On). Check the positioning status before setting  
the clock.  
Use GPS to set clock  
B Notes About Use GPS to Set Clock  
Date/time adjustment by Use GPS to set clock is set according to the time zone  
set in Time zone and date (A28, E73) of the setup menu. Check the time  
zone before setting Use GPS to set clock.  
The date/time set using Use GPS to set clock is not as accurate as radio clocks.  
Use Time zone and date in the setup menu to set the time if it is not accurate in  
Use GPS to set clock.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E95  
       
Eye-Fi Upload  
Press the dbutton Mz tab (A13) MEye-Fi upload  
Option  
Enable  
(default setting)  
Description  
Upload images created by the camera to a preselected  
destination.  
b
c
Disable  
Images are not uploaded.  
B Notes About Eye-Fi Cards  
Note that images will not be uploaded if signal strength is insufficient even if  
Enable is selected.  
Remove your Eye-Fi card from the camera where wireless devices are prohibited.  
Signals may be transmitted even if Disable is selected.  
Refer to the instruction manual of your Eye-Fi card for more information. In the  
event of malfunction, contact the card manufacturer.  
The camera can be used to turn Eye-Fi cards on and off, but may not support other  
Eye-Fi functions.  
The camera is not compatible with the Endless Memory function. When it is set on  
a computer, disable the function. If the Endless Memory function is enabled, the  
number of images taken may not be displayed correctly.  
Eye-Fi cards are for use only in the country of purchase. Observe all local laws  
concerning wireless devices.  
Leaving the setting as Enable will result in the battery being depleted in a shorter  
period of time.  
C Eye-Fi Communication Indicator  
The communication status of the Eye-Fi card in the camera can be confirmed in the  
monitor (A14).  
w: Eye-Fi upload is set to Disable.  
x (lights): Eye-Fi upload enabled; waiting to begin upload.  
x (flashes): Eye-Fi upload enabled; uploading data.  
z: An error occurred. The camera cannot control the Eye-Fi card.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E96  
   
MF Distance Indicator Units  
Press the dbutton Mz tab (A13) MMF distance indicator units  
Set either m (meter) (default setting) or ft (feet) for the unit of gauge displayed  
when the focus mode is set to manual focus (A66).  
Reverse Indicators  
Press the dbutton Mz tab (A13) MReverse indicators  
Change the +/– display direction of the exposure indicator (A51) displayed  
when shooting mode is Dand the indicator displayed for setting bracketing  
Default setting: The – side of the indicators is set to the left and + side is set  
to the right.  
Flash Control  
Press the dbutton Mz tab (A13) MFlash control  
Set whether or not to switch the flash to be used.  
Option  
Description  
When the Speedlight (external flash unit) (E108) is  
attached, the Speedlight fires. When the Speedlight is  
not used, the built-in flash fires.  
Auto  
(default setting)  
a
The built-in flash is always disabled. Only the  
Speedlight is used.  
Optional flash  
W
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E97  
           
Reset All  
Press the dbutton Mz tab (A13) MReset all  
When Reset is selected, the camera's settings are restored to their default  
values.  
Some settings, such as Time zone and date or Language, are not reset.  
User settings that were saved in E, Fand Nof the mode dial are not  
reset. To reset these settings, use Reset user settings (A75).  
C Resetting File Numbering  
To reset file numbering to “0001”, delete all images saved in the internal memory or  
on the memory card before selecting Reset all. Reset file numbering can also be  
used to reset to “0001” (E94).  
Firmware Version  
Press the dbutton Mz tab (A13) MFirmware version  
View the current camera firmware version.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E98  
       
Error Messages  
Refer to the table below if an error message is displayed.  
Display  
Battery temperature The camera turns off automatically. Wait until  
high the battery has cooled before resuming use.  
The camera will turn The inside of the camera has become hot.  
Cause/Solution  
A
off to prevent  
overheating.  
The camera turns off automatically. Wait until  
the camera has cooled before resuming use.  
The write-protect switch is in the “lock” position.  
Slide the write-protect switch to the “write”  
position.  
Memory card is write  
protected.  
This card cannot be  
used.  
An error occurred while accessing the memory  
card.  
Use an approved card.  
Check that the terminals are clean.  
Confirm that the memory card is correctly  
inserted.  
This card cannot be  
read.  
The memory card has not been formatted for  
use in the camera.  
Formatting deletes all data saved on the  
Card is not formatted. memory card. If you need to keep copies of any  
Format card?  
images, make sure to select No and save the  
copies to a computer or other medium before  
formatting the memory card. Select Yes and  
press the kbutton to format the memory card.  
The write-protect switch of the Eye-Fi card is in  
the “lock” position.  
An error occurred while accessing the Eye-Fi  
card.  
Not available if Eye-Fi  
card is locked.  
Check that the terminals are clean.  
Confirm that the Eye-Fi card is correctly  
inserted.  
E65,  
Out of memory.  
Delete images or insert a new memory card.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E99  
   
Display  
Cause/Solution  
A
An error occurred while saving the image.  
Insert a new memory card or format the internal  
memory or memory card.  
The camera has run out of file numbers.  
Insert a new memory card or format the internal  
memory or memory card.  
Image cannot be  
saved.  
The image cannot be used for the welcome  
screen.  
There is insufficient space to save the copy.  
Delete images from the destination.  
A voice memo cannot be attached to this  
Sound file cannot be image.  
saved.  
Voice memos cannot be attached to movies.  
Select an image captured with this camera.  
Select images that support the editing  
function.  
Images captured with cameras other than  
this camera cannot be edited.  
Image cannot be  
modified.  
A time-out error occurred while saving the  
Cannot record movie. movie on the memory card.  
Select a memory card with a faster write speed.  
File numbering cannot be reset because the  
sequential number of a folder has reached the  
upper limit.  
Insert a new memory card or format the internal  
memory or memory card.  
Cannot reset file  
numbering.  
There are no images in the internal memory or  
on the memory card.  
Remove the memory card from the camera to 24  
play back images in the camera’s internal  
memory.  
Memory contains no  
images.  
To copy the images saved in the camera’s  
internal memory to the memory card, press  
the dbutton to select Copy in the  
playback menu.  
File contains no  
image data.  
The file was not created or edited with this  
camera.  
The file cannot be viewed on this camera.  
View the file using a computer or the device  
used to create or edit this file.  
This file cannot be  
played back.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E100  
Display  
Cause/Solution  
A
There are no images available for a slide  
show, etc.  
There are no images that can be displayed on  
the image selection screen for deletion.  
All images are hidden.  
This image cannot be The image is protected.  
deleted.  
Disable protection.  
All registered menu items cannot be changed at  
the current setting.  
Some functions cannot be used in  
combination with other menu settings.  
There is no item that can be set using the  
current shooting mode.  
Change the menu item to be registered in My E93  
Menu.  
My Menu can not be  
changed at current  
settings.  
When the scene mode is Scene auto  
selector, you can take an image even if the  
flash is lowered but the flash will not fire.  
When the scene mode is Night portrait or  
Backlighting with HDR set to Off, you must  
raise the flash to take an image.  
Raise the flash.  
Refer to the documentation provided with your  
Speedlight or wireless Speedlight commander  
to check the settings.  
Speedlight setting  
error  
E59,  
A lens error occurred.  
Turn the camera off and then on again. If the  
error persists, contact your retailer or Nikon-  
authorized service representative.  
Lens error  
An error occurred while communicating with  
Communications  
error  
the printer.  
Turn the camera off and reconnect the USB  
cable.  
An error occurred in the camera’s internal  
circuitry.  
Turn the camera off, remove and reinsert the  
battery, and turn the camera on. If the error  
persists, contact your retailer or Nikon-  
authorized service representative.  
System error  
The camera clock is not set correctly.  
Change the location or time and determine the  
location again.  
Failed to acquire GPS  
data.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E101  
Display  
Cause/Solution  
A
Printer error: check  
printer status.  
After solving the problem, select Resume and  
press the kbutton to resume printing.*  
Printer error: check  
paper  
Load the specified size of paper, select Resume,  
and press the kbutton to resume printing.*  
Printer error: paper  
jam  
Remove the jammed paper, select Resume, and  
press the kbutton to resume printing.*  
Printer error: out of  
paper  
Load the specified size of paper, select Resume,  
and press the kbutton to resume printing.*  
There is a problem with the printer’s ink.  
Check the ink, select Resume, and press the k  
button to resume printing.*  
Printer error: check  
ink  
Printer error: out of  
ink  
Replace the ink cartridge, select Resume, and  
press the kbutton to resume printing.*  
There is a problem with the image file to be  
Printer error: file  
corrupt  
printed.  
Select Cancel and press the kbutton to cancel  
printing.  
*
See the documentation provided with your printer for further guidance and  
information.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E102  
File Names  
Images, movies, or voice memos are assigned file names as follows.  
File name: DSCN0001.JPG  
(1)  
(2)  
(3)  
Not shown on camera monitor.  
Original still images, movies, still images extracted  
from movies  
DSCN  
SSCN  
RSCN  
Small picture copies  
Cropped copies  
(1) Identifier  
Images created by an image editing function other  
than crop and small picture, movies created by the  
movie editing function  
FSCN  
Assigned automatically in ascending order, starting with  
“0001” and ending up with “9999.”  
When a file number reaches “9999,” a new folder is created  
and the next file number returns to “0001.”  
(2) File number  
A new folder is created each time a series of images are  
captured using panorama assist or interval timer shooting,  
and the images are saved in that folder with file numbers  
starting with “0001.”  
Indicates file format.  
.JPG  
JPEG still images  
.NRW  
.MOV  
RAW still images  
Movies  
(3) Extension  
Voice memos  
.WAV  
Identifier and file number are the same as the  
image to which the voice memo is attached.  
B Notes  
When images are shot with an Image quality (E27) setting of RAW (NRW) + Fine  
or RAW (NRW) + Normal, the RAW (NRW) and JPEG images that are recorded at the  
same time are assigned the same identifier and file number. The pair of images is  
saved in the same folder and is counted as one file.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E103  
                         
Optional Accessories  
AC Adapter EH-5b and power connector:  
When the power connector is inserted into the camera  
and the AC adapter is connected, the camera can be  
powered from an electrical outlet. The AC adapter and  
the power connector are available separately.  
<How to attach the EP-5A>  
1
2
3
AC adapter/power  
connector  
Before closing the battery-chamber/memory card slot  
cover, fully insert the cord of the power connector into the  
slot in the battery chamber. If part of the cord runs out of  
the grooves, the cover or cord may be damaged when the  
cover is closed.  
Insert the DC plug of the AC Adapter EH-5b into the DC  
plug connector of the Power Connector EP-5A.  
Audio video cable  
Audio Video Cable EG-CP16  
flash unit), wireless  
Speedlight  
commander  
Filter  
40.5mm screw-on filter 40.5 NC  
Lens Hood HN-CP17:  
Cuts out light which  
adversely affects the  
image and protects the  
lens surface. A 58mm  
screw-on filter can be  
attached to the lens  
hood.  
Lens hood  
External microphone Stereo Microphone ME-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E104  
           
Wireless Mobile Adapter WU-1a:  
When you attach the WU-1a to the USB/audio/video  
output connector of the camera, the camera can connect  
via Wi-Fi (wireless LAN) connection to smart devices that  
have the dedicated software installed.  
You can use your smart device to release the camera's  
shutter by remote operation or copy images stored on the  
memory card inserted in the camera to the smart device.  
Wireless mobile  
adapter  
Operations other than turning on and off the camera  
using the camera's controls cannot be performed  
during remote control operation.  
This function cannot be used when the Eye-Fi card is  
inserted into the camera.  
See our websites, product catalogs, or the documentation  
provided with the WU-1a for further details.  
Remote Control ML-L3 (E106)  
Remote Cord MC-DC2:  
When attached to the accessory terminal, you can release  
the shutter using the MC-DC2 instead of pressing the  
shutter-release button on the camera.  
Wireless Remote Controller WR-R10, WR-T10:  
When the WR-R10 (receiver) is attached to the accessory  
terminal, you can release the shutter wirelessly from the  
WR-T10 (transmitter).  
Remote control*  
When using a tripod, attach the camera to the tripod  
before attaching the WR-R10.  
When using the WR-R10, first attach it, select  
Accessory terminal in the setup menu, and then set  
Power supply (E95) to On.  
GPS accessory  
Hand strap  
GPS Unit GP-1 (E113)  
Hand Strap AH-CP1  
*
Setting a longer Auto off time (E84) is recommended when using the remote  
control function.  
Availability may vary with country or region.  
See our website or brochures for the latest information.  
B Using a Commercially Available Step-up Ring  
When a commercially available step-up ring is used, remove the lens ring (A1) from  
the camera.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E105  
         
Shooting with Remote Control ML-L3  
Use the Remote Control ML-L3 (available separately) (E105) to release the  
shutter. Set Vibration reduction (E79) in the setup menu to Off when  
using a tripod to stabilize the camera.  
1
Press the multi selector J(n).  
2
Select remote control mode and  
use Kto display the setting.  
Select the remote control setting and press  
the kbutton.  
Z : Press the transmission button on the  
remote control to shoot instantly (quick-  
response remote).  
Remote control  
Z 10s (10 seconds), Z 2s (2 seconds) and  
Z 1s (1 second) : Press the transmission button on the remote control to  
shoot with the selected seconds delay (self-timer remote control).  
If the kbutton is not pressed within a few seconds, the selection will be  
canceled.  
3
Frame the picture.  
1/250  
F5.6  
1280  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E106  
   
4
Aim the transmitter at the infrared  
receiver on the front of the  
camera (A1) and press the  
transmission button.  
Press the transmission button from a  
distance of 5 m (16 ft) or less.  
In the quick-response remote mode, once  
the subject is in focus, the shutter is  
released.  
When the time for self-timer is set to Z 10s  
(10 seconds) or Z 2s (2 seconds), the self-timer lamp flashes when the  
subject is in focus, and then about 1 second before the shutter is released,  
the lamp stops flashing and remains lit. To stop the self-timer before an  
image is taken, press the transmission button again.  
In the self-timer remote control mode, the remote control mode is set to Z  
(quick-response remote) when the shutter is released.  
Replacing the Battery for Remote Control ML-L3 (3V  
CR2025 Lithium Battery)  
When changing the remote control battery, make sure that the battery’s positive  
(+) and negative (–) terminals are oriented correctly.  
Make sure to read and follow the warnings of “For Your Safety” (Avii).  
B Notes About the Remote Control  
The remote control may not function even from a distance of 5 m (16 ft) or less  
when shooting in backlit conditions.  
The setting may not be changed when using certain settings of other functions.  
C More Information  
See “Self-timer: After Release“ (E78) for more information.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E107  
 
Speedlights (External Flash Unit)  
With this camera, various functions are available in combination with the  
Speedlight (external flash unit) supported by the Nikon Creative Lighting  
System (CLS) (E109). Use the Speedlight when the built-in flash cannot  
provide sufficient lighting.  
The following Speedlights and wireless Speedlight commander can be used for  
the camera.  
SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700, SB-600,  
SB-400, SB-R200*  
Speedlights  
Wireless Speedlight commander  
SU-800  
*
Speedlight used for remote flash. Attachment Ring SX-1 cannot be mounted on  
this camera. To use the SB-R200, it must be attached to the Speedlight Stand AS-20.  
How to Attach the Speedlight/Wireless Speedlight  
Commander  
Do not raise the built-in flash.  
Remove the accessory shoe cover from  
the camera.  
Refer to the documentation provided  
with your Speedlight/wireless  
Speedlight commander for more  
information on how to attach and  
detach the Speedlight with a locking  
pin and other details.  
Attach the accessory shoe cover when  
the accessory shoe is not in use.  
Attempting to attach an accessory that  
does not support this camera may  
damage the camera and the accessory.  
B Use Only Nikon Flash Accessories  
Use only Nikon Speedlights. Flash units of other manufacturers (with voltages over  
250 V applied to the camera's X sync contact, or causing short circuit at the accessory  
shoe contact) could not only prevent normal operation, but damage the sync  
circuitry of the camera or flash.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E108  
         
Functions That Can Be Used in Combination with the  
Speedlight  
SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700 or SB-600  
CLS compatible Speedlight  
SB-910  
SB-800 SB-700 SB-600  
SB-900  
1
i-TTL-BL flash  
w
w
w
w
w
i-TTL  
3
3
3
Standard i-TTL flash  
w
w
w
w
w
4
4
4
AA  
A
Auto aperture flash  
Non-TTL auto flash  
w
4
Single  
w
flash unit  
Distance priority manual  
flash  
GN  
w
w
w
M
Manual flash  
w
w
w
w
w
w
w
w
w
w
w
w
w
w
w
w
w
w
w
w
w
w
w
w
RPT  
Repeating flash  
2
Instruction to flash unit  
w
w
i-TTL  
AA  
i-TTL flash  
Auto aperture flash  
Manual flash  
M
w
RPT  
i-TTL  
AA  
Repeating flash  
i-TTL flash  
w
w
Auto aperture flash  
Manual flash  
M
w
w
w
w
RPT  
Repeating flash  
Transmission of flash color temperature  
information  
w
w
w
w
Flash mode setting from camera  
1
2
3
4
Not available when metering mode is set to Spot.  
The remote flash unit can control Group A only.  
Can also be set on the Speedlight.  
The selection of AA mode and A mode is performed using the custom setting for  
the Speedlight.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E109  
 
SU-800, SB-400 or SB-R200  
CLS compatible Speedlight  
SU-800 SB-400 SB-R200  
1
i-TTL-BL flash  
w
w
i-TTL  
Standard i-TTL flash  
Auto aperture flash  
Non-TTL auto flash  
AA  
A
Single  
flash unit  
Distance priority manual  
flash  
GN  
3
M
Manual flash  
w
RPT  
Repeating flash  
2
Instruction to flash unit  
w
i-TTL  
AA  
i-TTL flash  
Auto aperture flash  
Manual flash  
M
RPT  
i-TTL  
AA  
Repeating flash  
i-TTL flash  
w
Auto aperture flash  
Manual flash  
M
w
RPT  
Repeating flash  
Transmission of flash color temperature  
information  
w
w
Flash mode setting from camera  
1
2
3
Not available when metering mode is set to Spot.  
The remote flash unit can control Group A only.  
This setting can be made using the flash mode (A59) of this camera. When S  
(manual) is set, fill flash fires at the flash output that was set. If other flash mode is  
set, i-TTL Flash is enabled.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E110  
C Notes About i-TTL Flash  
The monitor preflashes are fired to measure the reflecting light from a subject in  
order to adjust the flash output of the Speedlight.  
- i-TTL-BL flash: The flash output is adjusted with consideration for the balance  
between a subject and its background light.  
- Standard i-TTL flash: The flash output is adjusted to achieve proper exposure  
according to the brightness of the main subject without consideration of the  
background light. This setting is optimal for taking images with emphasis on the  
main subjects.  
When shooting using i-TTL flash, set the flash control mode of the Speedlight to i-  
TTL before taking images (except SB-400).  
When shooting using SB-700 or SB-400 and if Metering of the camera is set to  
Matrix or Center-weighted, i-TTL-BL flash is set. If Metering of the camera is set  
to Spot, Standard i-TTL flash is set.  
C Notes About Speedlights  
This camera does not support Auto FP High-Speed Sync, FV lock, red-eye reduction  
or AF-assist for multi-area AF when using Speedlights.  
The power zoom function can be used with Speedlights SB-910, SB-900, SB-800,  
SB-700 or SB-600 and the zoom head position is automatically set depending on  
the focal length of the lens.  
When using Speedlights SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700 or SB-600, the edges of  
images shot at ranges less than 2 m (6 ft 7 in.) on the wide-angle zoom position  
may appear dark. In such cases, use the wide panel.  
When set to STBY (standby), the Speedlight turns on and off at the same time as  
the camera. Confirm on the Speedlight that the Ready-light is on.  
Advanced Wireless Lighting shooting can be performed by setting SB-910, SB-900,  
SB-800 or SB-700 attached to this camera to master flash, or by setting SU-800 to  
the Commander mode, and setting SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700, SB-600 or  
SB-R200 to remote flash (when shooting with this camera, the remote flash setting  
is only applicable to Group A).  
Advanced Wireless Lighting shooting can be performed also by using this camera's  
bulit-in flash in Commander mode (only applicable to Group A and fixed at 3 CH)  
Refer to the documentation provided with your Speedlight for more information.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E111  
B Notes About Using the Remote Flash Unit  
Set up the remote flash unit in a position close to the subject from the camera to  
ensure the light from the Speedlight to enter the sensor window.  
Aside from monitor preflashes, the master flash unit emits a minute amount of  
flashes to control the remote flash unit. When shooting a subject at a short  
distance from the master flash unit, these minute amounts of flashes may cause  
adverse effects and the proper exposure may not be achieved. To reduce such  
adverse effects, use the wide panel for the master flash when the master flash unit  
is directly facing a subject that is being shot at a short distance.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E112  
Using the GPS Unit  
When the GPS unit (available separately) is attached to the accessory terminal,  
signals from GPS satellites are received to determine the current position and  
the position information (latitude and longitude) can be recorded on the  
images to be shot.  
Position information recorded on images can be checked on a map with  
ViewNX 2 after transferring the images to a computer (A104).  
How to Attach the GPS Unit  
Turn the camera off before attaching the GPS unit.  
Make sure that the plug is inserted in the correct direction. Inserting the  
plug in the wrong direction could damage the plug or connector.  
To use the built-in flash, do not attach the GPS unit to the accessory shoe.  
Recording GPS Data on Images  
Set Power supply of Accessory terminal in the setup menu to On  
(default setting) (E95).  
Signals are received from GPS satellites and positioning starts.  
When you take an image at a place where positioning is successfully  
performed, the position information is recorded on the image.  
Operate in an open-air area when starting to receive signals from GPS  
satellites.  
Be aware of your surroundings when positioning.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E113  
         
C GPS Reception Indicator  
GPS reception can be checked on the shooting screen (A14).  
n: Signals are being received from four or more satellites and determine position.  
Position information is recorded on the image.  
o: Signals are being received from three satellites and determine position.  
Position information is recorded on the image.  
z: Signals are no longer received from the satellites. If the camera has position  
information that has been obtained in the last 1 minute, this position information is  
recorded on the image.  
y: Signals cannot be received from the satellites, and positioning is not possible.  
The position information is not recorded on the image.  
C Information Recorded on Images  
The shooting date and time that is displayed when playing back images is  
determined by the camera’s internal clock at the time of shooting. The time  
obtained by the position information and recorded on images will not be  
displayed on the camera.  
Position information for the first frame will be recorded on a series of pictures shot  
using continuous shooting.  
Position information cannot be displayed on the camera.  
The actual place of shooting may differ from the GPS information recorded on the  
image files due to the accuracy of the position information obtained and a  
difference in the geodetic system used.  
B Notes About Images with Recorded Position Information  
An individual may be identified from images that have been recorded with position  
information. Observe caution when you transfer images recorded with position  
information to a third party or upload them to a network such as the Internet where  
the public can view them.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E114  
 
Technical Notes  
and Index  
Caring for the Products................................... F2  
The Camera.............................................................................................F2  
The Battery..............................................................................................F3  
The Battery Charger.............................................................................F4  
Memory Cards........................................................................................F5  
Caring for the Camera ..................................... F6  
Cleaning...................................................................................................F6  
Storage.....................................................................................................F7  
Troubleshooting..............................................F8  
Specifications.................................................F16  
Index...............................................................F22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F1  
   
Caring for the Products  
The Camera  
To ensure continued enjoyment of this Nikon product, observe the precautions  
described below in addition to the warnings in “For Your Safety” (Avii-ix)  
when using or storing the device.  
B Do Not Drop  
The product may malfunction if subjected to strong shock or vibration.  
B Handle the Lens and All Moving Parts with Care  
Do not apply force to the lens, lens cover, monitor, memory card slot, or battery  
chamber. These parts are easily damaged. Applying force to the lens cover could  
result in camera malfunction or damage to the lens. Should the monitor break, care  
should be taken to avoid injury caused by broken glass and to prevent the liquid  
crystal from the display touching the skin or entering the eyes or mouth.  
B Keep Dry  
The device will be damaged if immersed in water or subjected to high humidity.  
B Avoid Sudden Changes in Temperature  
Sudden changes in temperature, such as when entering or leaving a heated building  
on a cold day, can cause condensation to form inside the device. To prevent  
condensation, place the device in a carrying case or a plastic bag before exposing it  
to sudden changes in temperature.  
B Keep away from Strong Magnetic Fields  
Do not use or store this device in the vicinity of equipment that generates strong  
electromagnetic radiation or magnetic fields. Strong static charge or the magnetic  
fields produced by equipment such as radio transmitters could interfere with the  
monitor, damage data saved on the memory card, or affect the product’s internal  
circuitry.  
B Do Not Point the Lens at Strong Light Sources for Extended  
Periods  
Avoid pointing the lens at the sun or other strong light sources for extended periods  
when using or storing the camera. Intense light may cause deterioration of the  
image sensor, producing a white blur effect in photographs.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F2  
   
B Turn the Product off Before Removing or Disconnecting the Power  
Source or the Memory Card  
Do not remove the battery while the product is on, or while images are being saved  
or deleted. Forcibly cutting power in these circumstances could result in loss of data  
or in damage to product memory or internal circuitry.  
B Notes About the Monitor  
Monitors and electronic viewfinders are constructed with extremely high precision;  
at least 99.99% of pixels are effective, with no more than 0.01% being missing or  
defective. Hence while these displays may contain pixels that are always lit (white,  
red, blue, or green) or always off (black), this is not a malfunction and has no effect  
on images recorded with the device.  
Images in the monitor may be difficult to see under bright lighting.  
The monitor is lit by an LED backlight. Should the monitor begin to dim or flicker,  
contact your Nikon-authorized service representative.  
The Battery  
Be sure to read and follow the warnings in “For Your Safety” (Avii-ix) before  
use.  
Check the battery level before using the camera and replace or charge the  
battery if necessary. Do not continue charging once the battery is fully  
charged as this will result in reduced battery performance. Whenever  
possible, carry a fully charged spare battery when taking images on  
important occasions.  
Do not use the battery at ambient temperatures below 0°C (32°F) or above  
40°C (104°F).  
Charge the battery indoors with an ambient temperature of 5°C to 35°C  
(41°F to 95°F) before use.  
When the battery temperature is between 0°C and 10°C (32°F to 50°F) or  
45°C to 60°C (113°F to 140°F), the chargeable capacity may decrease.  
The battery is not charged at ambient temperatures below 0°C (32°F) or  
above 60°C (140°F).  
Note that the battery may become hot during use; wait for the battery to  
cool before charging. Failure to observe these precautions could damage  
the battery, impair its performance, or prevent it from charging normally.  
On cold days, the capacity of batteries tends to decrease. If an exhausted  
battery is used at a low temperature, the camera will not turn on. Be sure  
that the battery is fully charged before heading outside to take images in  
cold weather. Keep spare batteries in a warm place and exchange as  
necessary. Once warmed, a cold battery may recover some of its charge.  
Dirt on the battery terminals can prevent the camera from functioning.  
Should the battery terminals become dirty, wipe them off with a clean, dry  
cloth before use.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F3  
   
If the battery will not be used for some time, insert it in the camera and  
completely exhaust it before removing it for storage. The battery should be  
stored in a cool location with an ambient temperature of 15°C to 25°C (59°F  
to 77°F). Do not store the battery in hot or extremely cold locations.  
Always remove the battery from the camera or battery charger when it is not  
being used. When inserted, minute amounts of current are drawn from the  
battery even when not in use. This may result in excessive draining of the  
battery and complete loss of function. Turning the camera on or off while  
the battery is exhausted can result in reduced battery life.  
Recharge the battery at least once every six months and completely exhaust  
it before returning it to storage.  
After removing the battery from the camera or battery charger, attach the  
included terminal cover to the battery and store it in a cool place.  
A marked drop in the time a fully-charged battery retains its charge, when  
used at room temperature, indicates that the battery needs to be replaced.  
Purchase a new EN-EL14 battery.  
Replace the battery when it no longer holds a charge. Used batteries are a  
valuable resource. Please recycle used batteries in accordance with local  
regulations.  
The Battery Charger  
Be sure to read and follow the warnings of “For Your Safety” (Avii-ix)  
thoroughly before using the battery charger.  
The included battery charger is for use only with a Rechargeable Li-ion  
Battery EN-EL14.  
The MH-24 is compatible with AC 100-240 V, 50/60 Hz electrical outlets.  
When using in other countries, use a commercially available plug adapter as  
necessary. For more information about plug adapters, consult your travel  
agency.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F4  
 
Memory Cards  
Use only Secure Digital memory cards. See “Approved Memory Cards”  
Observe the precautions noted in the documentation included with your  
memory card.  
Do not affix labels or stickers to the memory card.  
Do not format the memory card using a computer.  
The first time you insert a memory card that has been used in another device  
into this camera, be sure to format it with this camera. We recommend  
formatting new memory cards with this camera before using them with this  
camera.  
Note that formatting a memory card permanently deletes all images  
and other data on the memory card. If there is data saved on the memory  
card that you wish to keep, copy that data to a computer before formatting.  
If the message Card is not formatted. Format card? is displayed when  
the camera is turned on, the memory card must be formatted. If there is data  
on the memory card that you do not want to delete, select No and press the  
kbutton. Copy that data to a computer before formatting. To format the  
memory card, select Yes.  
Observe the following precautions while formatting the memory card,  
saving and deleting images, and copying images to a computer, otherwise  
data or the memory card itself may be damaged.  
-
Do not open the battery-chamber/memory card slot cover or remove the  
memory card or battery.  
-
-
Do not turn off the camera.  
Do not disconnect the AC adapter.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F5  
   
Caring for the Camera  
Cleaning  
Avoid touching glass parts with your fingers. Remove dust or lint with  
a blower (typically a small device with a rubber bulb attached to one  
end that is pumped to produce a stream of air out the other end). To  
remove fingerprints or other stains that cannot be removed with a  
Lens/  
viewfinder blower, wipe the lens with a soft cloth, using a spiral motion that  
starts at the center of them and working toward the edges. If this fails,  
clean the lens using a cloth lightly dampened with commercial lens  
cleaner.  
Remove dust or lint with a blower. To remove fingerprints and other  
Monitor  
stains, clean the monitor with a soft, dry cloth, being careful not to  
apply pressure.  
Use a blower to remove dust, dirt, or sand, then wipe gently with a  
soft, dry cloth. After using the camera at the beach or other sandy or  
dusty environment, wipe off any sand, dust, or salt with a dry cloth  
lightly dampened with fresh water and dry thoroughly. Note that  
foreign matter inside the camera could cause damage not  
covered by the warranty.  
Body  
Do not use volatile organic solvents such as alcohol or thinner, chemical  
detergents, anticorrosive agents, or anti-fogging agents.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F6  
           
Storage  
Turn the camera off when not in use. Be sure that the power-on lamp is off  
before putting the camera away. Remove the battery if the camera will not be  
used for an extended period. Do not store the camera with naphtha or  
camphor moth balls, or in any of the following locations:  
Next to equipment that produces strong electromagnetic fields, such as  
televisions or radios  
Exposed to temperatures below –10°C (14°F) or above 50°C (122°F)  
Places that are poorly ventilated or subject to humidity of over 60%  
To prevent mold or mildew, take the camera out of storage at least once a  
month. Turn the camera on and release the shutter a few times before putting  
the camera away again.  
For storing the battery, follow the precautions in “The Battery” (F3) in “Caring  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F7  
 
Troubleshooting  
If the camera fails to function as expected, check the list of common problems  
below before consulting your retailer or Nikon-authorized service  
representative.  
Power, Display, Settings Issues  
Problem  
Cause/Solution  
A
Wait for recording to end.  
If the problem persists, turn the camera off. If the  
camera does not turn off, remove and reinsert the  
battery or batteries or, if you are using an AC adapter,  
disconnect and reconnect the AC adapter.  
Note that although any data currently being  
recorded will be lost, data that have already been  
recorded will not be affected by removing or  
disconnecting the power source.  
The camera is on  
but does not  
respond.  
The battery is exhausted.  
The camera cannot be turned on if the battery-  
chamber/memory card slot cover is open.  
Camera cannot  
be turned on.  
The camera automatically turns off to save power  
(auto off function).  
The camera or battery have become too cold and  
cannot operate properly.  
The inside of the camera has become hot. Leave the  
camera off until the inside of the camera has cooled,  
and then try turning it on again.  
Camera turns off  
without  
warning.  
The camera is off.  
The battery is exhausted.  
The camera has entered standby mode to save  
power. Press the power switch, shutter-release  
button or cbutton, or rotate the mode dial.  
You cannot turn on both the monitor and viewfinder  
at the same time. It may take a while to switch  
between the monitor and viewfinder.  
The monitor or  
viewfinder is  
blank.  
The camera and computer are connected via a USB 102,  
cable. 106  
The camera and TV are connected via an audio video 102,  
cable or HDMI cable.  
Interval timer shooting in progress.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F8  
   
Problem  
Cause/Solution  
A
The ambient light is too bright. Move to a darker  
place or use the viewfinder.  
Adjust the monitor brightness.  
Monitor is hard  
to see.  
The monitor is dirty. Clean the monitor.  
Image in the  
viewfinder is  
difficult to see.  
Adjust the viewfinder using the diopter adjustment  
control.  
If the camera clock has not been set, the “Date not  
set” indicator flashes during shooting and movie  
recording. Images and movies saved before the clock  
is set are dated “00/00/0000 00:00” or “01/01/2013  
00:00” respectively. Set the correct time and date  
from the Time zone and date option in the setup  
menu.  
Date and time of  
recording are  
not correct.  
The camera clock is not as accurate as ordinary  
watches or clocks. Periodically compare the time of E73  
the camera clock with that of a more accurate  
timepiece and reset as required.  
Shooting and photo information may be hidden. After  
No information  
displayed in  
monitor.  
confirming that the Fn2 button setting is set to Show/ 11, 101,  
hide info, press the w2 button until information is  
displayed.  
Print date not Time zone and date has not been set in the setup  
available.  
menu.  
Date not  
The current shooting mode does not support Print 99,  
imprinted on  
images even  
when Print  
date is enabled.  
date.  
A function that restricts the print date is enabled.  
The date cannot be imprinted on movies.  
Screen for  
setting time  
zone and date is  
displayed when  
camera is turned  
on.  
The clock battery is exhausted; all settings were  
restored to their default values.  
Camera settings  
reset.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F9  
Problem  
Cause/Solution  
A
Although a new folder is created in the internal  
memory or on the memory card by resetting file  
numbering, etc., if the sequential number of a folder  
name (which is not displayed on the camera) reaches  
Reset file  
numbering  
cannot be done. the upper limit (“999”), reset is not possible. Change the  
memory card, or format the internal memory/memory  
card.  
The camera may become hot when used for an  
Camera  
becomes hot.  
extended period of time to shoot movies or send  
images using an Eye-Fi card, or when used in a hot  
environment; this is not a malfunction.  
When Autofocus mode is set to Full-time AF or while  
in some shooting modes, the camera may produce an 74, 96  
audible focusing sound.  
Camera makes  
sound.  
Shooting Issues  
Problem  
Cause/Solution  
A
Cannot switch  
to shooting  
mode.  
Disconnect the HDMI cable or USB cable.  
When the camera is in playback mode, press the c 36  
button or shutter-release button.  
When menus are displayed, press the dbutton.  
The battery is exhausted.  
When the scene mode is Night portrait or  
Backlighting with HDR set to Off, raise the flash.  
If the flash mode icon flashes when the shutter-  
release button is pressed halfway, the flash is  
charging.  
No image  
captured when  
the shutter-  
release button is  
pressed.  
When using the Speedlight, refer to the  
documentation provided with the Speedlight to  
check the settings.  
- When shooting using Advanced Wireless Lighting  
photography, set the group setting to Group A.  
When using the built-in flash as the commander,  
set the channel of the flash unit to 3 CH.  
- When the flash setting is enabled for a group other  
than Group A, disable the flash setting.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F10  
Problem  
Cause/Solution  
A
The subject is too close. Try shooting using the  
Scene auto selector or Close-up scene mode, or  
the close range only/macro close-up focus mode.  
Incorrect focus mode setting. Check or change the  
setting.  
Camera cannot  
focus.  
The subject is hard to focus on.  
Set AF assist in the setup menu to Auto.  
Subject is not in focus area when the shutter-release 34, 73  
button is pressed halfway.  
The focus mode is set to E (manual focus).  
Turn the camera off and then on again.  
Colored stripes may appear when shooting subjects  
with repeating patterns (such as window blinds); this is  
not a malfunction.  
The colored stripes will not appear in captured images  
or recorded movies. However, when using Continuous  
H: 120 fps or HS 480/4×, the colored stripes may be  
seen in the captured images and recorded movies.  
Colored stripes  
appear in the  
monitor when  
shooting.  
Use the flash.  
Enable vibration reduction.  
Use D (Best Shot Selector) of Continuous in the  
shooting menu.  
Use a tripod to stabilize the camera when shooting 62  
(using the self-timer at the same time is more  
effective).  
Images are  
blurred.  
Bright specks  
appear in  
imagescaptured mode setting to W (off ).  
The flash is reflecting off particles in the air. Set the flash  
with flash.  
The flash mode is set to W (off).  
A shooting mode where the flash cannot fire is  
selected.  
A function that restricts the flash is enabled.  
The built-in flash does not fire when an external flash E108  
Flash does not  
fire.  
unit (optional) is used.  
When shooting using Advanced Wireless Lighting  
photography, set the group setting to Group A.  
When using the built-in flash as the commander, set  
the channel of the remote flash unit to 3 CH.  
See the documentation provided with your  
Speedlight (external flash unit).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F11  
Problem  
Cause/Solution  
A
A function that restricts digital zoom is enabled.  
Digital zoom is set to Off or Crop in the setup  
menu.  
Digital zoom cannot be used in the following  
situations.  
-
-
When Scene auto selector, Portrait, Night  
portrait, Easy panorama in Panorama or Pet  
portrait is selected in scene mode  
When Zoom exposure is selected in special  
effects mode  
Digital zoom  
cannot be used.  
When Digital zoom is set to Crop in the setup  
menu, digital zoom cannot be used in the following  
situations.  
-
When Image size is F 4000×3000,  
E 3264×2448, I 3984×2656, u 3968×2232  
or H 3000×3000  
When Movie options is d 1080P/30p/  
o 1080P/25p, e 1080/30p/p 1080/  
25p, h/u HS 480/4×, i/w HS 720/  
or j/x HS 1080/0.5×  
-
-
When Continuous is set to Continuous H:  
120 fps or Continuous H: 60 fps  
A function that restricts the Image size option is  
Image size not  
available.  
enabled.  
When the scene mode is set to Easy panorama in 44  
Panorama, the image size is fixed.  
Off is selected for Sound settings > Shutter sound in  
the setup menu. No sound is produced with some  
shooting modes and settings, even when On is  
selected.  
No sound when  
shutter is  
released.  
Off is selected for the AF assist option in the setup  
AF-assist  
illuminator does  
not light.  
menu. AF-assist illuminator may not light depending on 99,  
the position of the focus area or the current scene  
mode, even when Auto is selected.  
Images appear  
smeared.  
The lens is dirty. Clean the lens.  
Colors are  
unnatural.  
White balance is not adjusted properly.  
The subject is dark, and the shutter speed is too slow or  
ISO sensitivity is too high. Noise can be reduced by:  
Randomly  
spaced bright  
pixels (“noise”)  
appear in image.  
Using the flash.  
Specifying a lower ISO sensitivity setting.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F12  
Problem  
Cause/Solution  
A
The flash mode is set to W (off).  
The flash window is blocked.  
The subject is beyond the range of the flash.  
Adjust exposure compensation.  
Increase ISO sensitivity.  
Images are too  
dark  
(underexposed).  
The subject is backlit. Raise the flash, and set the  
scene mode Backlighting with HDR set to Off or  
set the flash mode setting to m(fill flash).  
On is selected for Built-in ND filter in the shooting 74  
menu.  
Images are too  
bright  
(overexposed).  
Adjust exposure compensation.  
Use the Built-in ND filter setting in the shooting  
menu.  
When taking images with V (auto with red-eye  
reduction) or fill flash with red-eye reduction in Night  
portrait scene mode, In-Camera Red-Eye Fix may be  
applied to areas not affected by red-eye in rare cases.  
Use any scene mode other than Night portrait, and  
change the flash mode to any setting other than V  
(auto with red-eye reduction) and try taking an image  
again.  
Unexpected  
results when  
flash set to V  
(auto with red-  
eye reduction).  
In some shooting conditions, facial skin tones may  
not be softened.  
Skin tones are  
not softened.  
For images containing 4 or more faces, try using Skin 88,  
softening in the playback menu. E11  
It may take more time to save images in the following  
situations.  
When the noise reduction function is in operation  
When the flash mode is set to V (auto with red-eye 60  
reduction)  
When taking images in the following scene modes.  
- Hand-held in Night landscape  
Saving images  
takes time.  
- HDR set to other than Off in Backlighting  
- Easy panorama in Panorama  
Continuous in the shooting menu is set to  
Continuous H: 120 fps or Continuous H: 60 fps  
When using smile timer while shooting  
When using Active D-Lighting while shooting  
When Image quality is set to RAW (NRW), RAW  
(NRW) + Fine or RAW (NRW) + Normal  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F13  
Problem  
Cause/Solution  
A
When shooting with backlighting or when a very strong  
light source (such as sunlight) is in the frame, a ring-  
shaped belt or rainbow-colored stripe (ghosting) may  
occur.  
Change the position of the light source, or frame the  
image so that the light source does not enter the frame,  
and try again.  
A ring-shaped  
belt or rainbow-  
colored stripe  
appears in the  
monitor or  
images.  
Certain menu items are unavailable depending on  
the shooting mode. Menu items that cannot be  
selected are displayed in gray.  
A function that restricts the selected function is  
enabled.  
Cannot select a  
setting/Selected  
setting is  
disabled.  
Playback Issues  
Problem  
Cause/Solution  
A
This camera may not be able to play back images  
saved with another make or model of digital camera.  
This camera cannot play back RAW (NRW) images or  
movies captured or recorded with another make or  
model of digital camera.  
This camera may not be able to play back data edited  
on a computer.  
File cannot be  
played back.  
File cannot be played back during interval timer  
shooting.  
Playback zoom cannot be used with movies, small  
pictures, or images that have been cropped to a size of  
320 × 240 or smaller.  
Cannot zoom in  
on image.  
This camera may not be able to zoom in on images  
captured with another make or model of digital  
camera.  
Voice memos cannot be attached to movies.  
Voice memos cannot be attached to images taken  
using Easy panorama.  
Cannot record  
voice memo.  
Voice memos cannot be attached to images  
captured with other cameras. Voice memos attached E67  
to images using another camera cannot be played  
back on this camera.  
Some images cannot be edited. Images that have  
already been edited may not be edited again.  
There is not enough free space in the internal  
memory or on the memory card.  
This camera is unable to edit images captured with 90,  
other cameras.  
Cannot edit  
image.  
Editing functions used for images are not available  
for movies.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F14  
Problem  
Cause/Solution  
A
Video mode or HDMI is not correctly set in the TV 100,  
settings setup menu.  
The cables are connected to the HDMI mini  
connector and to the USB/audio/video output  
connector simultaneously.  
Images are not  
displayed on TV.  
The memory card contains no images. Replace the  
memory card. Remove the memory card to play back  
images from the internal memory.  
The camera is off.  
The battery is exhausted.  
The USB cable is not correctly connected.  
Nikon Transfer 2  
does not start  
when camera is  
connected to a  
computer.  
The camera is not recognized by the computer.  
Confirm system requirements.  
The computer is not set to start Nikon Transfer 2  
automatically. For more information about Nikon  
Transfer 2, refer to help information contained in  
ViewNX 2.  
The memory card contains no images. Replace the  
memory card.  
Remove the memory card to print images from the 25  
internal memory.  
Images to be  
printed are not  
displayed.  
The camera cannot be used to select the paper size in  
the following situations, even when printing from a  
PictBridge-compatible printer. Use the printer to select  
Cannot select  
paper size with the paper size.  
camera.  
The printer does not support the paper sizes  
specified by the camera.  
The printer automatically selects the paper size.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F15  
Specifications  
Nikon COOLPIX P7800 Digital Camera  
Type  
Compact digital camera  
Number of effective  
pixels  
12.2 million  
Image sensor  
Lens  
1/1.7-in. type CMOS; approx. 12.76 million total pixels  
NIKKOR lens with 7.1× optical zoom  
6.0-42.8 mm (angle of view equivalent to that of 28-200  
mm lens in 35mm [135] format)  
Focal length  
f/-number  
f/2-4  
Construction  
13 elements in 10 groups (2 ED lens elements)  
Still pictures: Up to 4× (angle of view equivalent to that of  
approx. 800 mm lens in 35mm [135] format)  
Movies: Up to 2× (angle of view equivalent to that of  
approx. 400 mm lens in 35mm [135] format)  
Digital zoom  
magnification  
Vibration reduction  
Autofocus (AF)  
Lens shift  
Contrast-detect AF  
[W]: Approx. 50 cm (1 ft 8 in.) - ,  
[T]: Approx. 80 cm (2 ft 8 in.) - ∞  
Macro close-up mode: Approx. 2 cm (0.8 in.) (at a  
wide-angle zoom position) - ∞  
Focus range  
(All distances measured from center of front surface of  
lens)  
Face priority, auto (9-area automatic selection), center  
Focus-area selection (wide, normal), manual with 99 focus areas, subject  
tracking, target finding AF  
Electronic viewfinder, 0.5 cm (0.2-in.) approx. 921k-dot  
Viewfinder  
LCD with the diopter adjustment function  
-1  
(–3 - +1 m  
)
Frame coverage  
(shooting mode)  
Approx. 100% horizontal and 100% vertical (compared  
to actual picture)  
Frame coverage  
(playback mode)  
Approx. 100% horizontal and 100% vertical (compared  
to actual picture)  
7.5 cm (3-in.), approx. 921k-dot (RGBW), wide viewing  
angle TFT LCD with anti-reflection coating and 6-level  
brightness adjustment, vari-angle TFT LCD  
Monitor  
Frame coverage  
(shooting mode)  
Approx. 100% horizontal and 100% vertical (compared  
to actual picture)  
Frame coverage  
(playback mode)  
Approx. 100% horizontal and 100% vertical (compared  
to actual picture)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F16  
       
Storage  
Media  
Internal memory (approx. 86 MB)  
SD/SDHC/SDXC memory card  
File system  
DCF, Exif 2.3 and DPOF compliant  
Still pictures: JPEG, RAW (NRW) (Nikon's own format)  
Sound files (voice memo): WAV  
Movies: MOV (Video: H.264/MPEG-4 AVC, Audio: AAC  
stereo)  
File formats  
12 M  
4 M  
VGA  
4000×3000  
2272×1704  
640×480  
8 M 3264×2448  
2 M 1600×1200  
Image size (pixels)  
3:2  
1:1  
3984×2656  
3000×3000  
16:9 9M 3968×2232  
ISO sensitivity  
(Standard output  
sensitivity)  
ISO 80 - 1600  
ISO 3200, Hi 1 (equivalent to ISO 6400) (available  
when using A, B, Cor Dmode)  
Exposure  
Matrix, center-weighted, or spot. Also when AF area  
mode is set to Manual, the AF area can be coupled to  
the metering range using Focus-coupled metering.  
Metering mode  
Programmed auto exposure with flexible program,  
shutter-priority auto, aperture-priority auto, manual,  
exposure bracketing (Tv, Av, Sv) enabled, exposure  
compensation (in steps of 1/3 EV in the range of +/–3.0  
EV for still pictures and +/–2.0 EV for movies) enabled  
Exposure control  
Shutter  
Mechanical and CMOS electronic shutter  
1/4000 * - 1 s  
1/4000 * - 60 s (when ISO sensitivity is set to 80 - 400  
in Dmode)  
Speed  
*
When the aperture value is set to f/4.5 - f/8 (wide-angle  
position) or the value is set to f/7.1 - f/8 (telephoto zoom  
position)  
Aperture  
Range  
Electronically-controlled 7-blade iris diaphragm  
13 steps of 1/3 EV (W) (C, Dmode)  
Self-timer  
Built-in flash  
Can be selected from 10 s, 2 s and 1 s  
Range (approx.)  
(ISO sensitivity: Auto)  
[W]: 0.5 - 10 m (1 ft 8 in. - 32 ft)  
[T]: 0.5 - 5.5 m (1 ft 8 in. - 18 ft)  
TTL auto flash with monitor preflashes; manual flash  
control available  
Flash control  
Flash exposure  
compensation  
In steps of 1/3 EV in the range between –2 and +2 EV  
ISO 518 hot-shoe with sync and data contacts and  
safety lock  
Accessory shoe  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F17  
i-TTL flash control support in combination with  
Nikon Creative Lighting System-compatible  
Speedlights (only Standard i-TTL flash control is  
supported during spot metering mode).  
Flash Color Information Communication is  
supported.  
Advanced Wireless Lighting is supported by setting  
SB-910, SB-900, SB-800 or SB-700 to master flash or  
by setting SU-800 to the Commander mode (the  
remote flash setting is only applicable to Group A).  
Advanced Wireless Lighting is supported by setting  
the built-in flash to the Commander mode (only  
applicable to Group A and fixed at 3 CH).  
Nikon Creative Lighting  
System  
Interface  
Hi-Speed USB  
Data transfer  
protocol  
MTP, PTP  
Video output  
HDMI output  
Can be selected from NTSC and PAL  
Can be selected from Auto, 480p, 720p, and 1080i  
Audio/video output; digital I/O (USB)  
HDMI mini connector (Type C) (HDMI output)  
External microphone connector (stereo mini-pin jack  
(3.5 mm diameter), plug-in power type)  
Accessory terminal  
I/O terminal  
Arabic, Bengali, Bulgarian, Chinese (Simplified and  
Traditional), Czech, Danish, Dutch, English, Finnish,  
French, German, Greek, Hindi, Hungarian, Indonesian,  
Italian, Japanese, Korean, Marathi, Norwegian, Persian,  
Polish, Portuguese (European and Brazilian), Romanian,  
Russian, Serbian, Spanish, Swedish, Tamil, Telugu, Thai,  
Turkish, Ukrainian, Vietnamese  
Supported languages  
Power sources  
One Rechargeable Li-ion Battery EN-EL14 (included)  
AC Adapter EH-5b (used in combination with the  
Power Connector EP-5A) (available separately)  
1
Battery life  
Still pictures  
Approx. 350 shots when using EN-EL14  
Approx. 1 h 15 min when recording in NTSC mode  
using EN-EL14  
Approx. 1 h 20 min when recording in PAL mode using  
EN-EL14  
Movie recording  
(actual battery life  
for recording)  
2
Tripod socket  
1/4 (ISO 1222)  
Dimensions  
(W × H × D)  
Approx. 118.5 × 77.5 × 50.4 mm (4.7 × 3.1 × 2.0 in.)  
(excluding projections)  
Approx. 399 g (14.1 oz) (including battery and SD  
memory card)  
Weight  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F18  
   
Operating environment  
Temperature  
0°C - 40°C (32°F - 104°F)  
Humidity  
85% or less (no condensation)  
Unless otherwise stated, all figures assume a fully-charged battery and an  
ambient temperature of 23 3°C (73.4 5.4°F) as specified by the Camera  
and Imaging Products Association (CIPA).  
1
2
Battery life may vary depending on conditions of use, such as the interval between  
shots or the length of time that menus and images are displayed.  
Individual movie files cannot exceed 4 GB in size or 29 minutes in length.  
Recording may end before this limit is reached if camera temperature becomes  
elevated.  
Rechargeable Li-ion Battery EN-EL14  
Type  
Rechargeable lithium-ion battery  
Rated capacity  
Operating temperature  
Dimensions (W × H × D)  
Weight  
DC 7.4 V, 1030 mAh  
0°C - 40°C (32°F - 104°F)  
Approx. 38 × 53 × 14 mm (1.5 × 2.1 × 0.6 in.)  
Approx. 48 g (1.7 oz) (excluding terminal cover)  
Battery Charger MH-24  
Rated input  
AC 100 - 240 V, 50/60 Hz, 0.2 A max.  
Rated output  
DC 8.4 V, 0.9 A  
Supported rechargeable  
battery  
Rechargeable Li-ion Battery EN-EL14  
Approx. 1 hour and 30 minutes when no charge  
remains  
Charging time  
Operating temperature  
0°C - 40°C (32°F - 104°F)  
Approx. 70 × 26 × 97 mm (2.8 × 1.0 × 3.8 in.)  
(excluding plug adapter)  
For Argentina: Approx. 70 × 68 × 104 mm (2.8 × 2.7  
× 4.1 in.)  
Dimensions  
(W × H × D)  
Approx. 89 g (3.1 oz) (excluding plug adapter)  
For Argentina: Approx. 125 g (4.5 oz)  
Weight  
B Specifications  
Nikon will not be held liable for any errors this manual may contain.  
The appearance of this product and its specifications are subject to change  
without notice.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F19  
   
AVC Patent Portfolio License  
This product is licensed under the AVC Patent Portfolio License for the personal  
and non-commercial use of a consumer to (i) encode video in compliance with  
the AVC standard (“AVC video”) and/or (ii) decode AVC video that was encoded  
by a consumer engaged in a personal and non-commercial activity and/or was  
obtained from a video provider licensed to provide AVC video. No license is  
granted or shall be implied for any other use. Additional information may be  
obtained from MPEG LA, L.L.C.  
See http://www.mpegla.com.  
FreeType License (FreeType2)  
Portions of this software are copyright © 2013 The FreeType Project  
(http://www.freetype.org). All rights reserved.  
MIT License (HarfBuzz)  
Portions of this software are copyright © 2013 The HarfBuzz Project (http://  
www.freedesktop.org/wiki/Software/HarfBuzz). All rights reserved.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F20  
Trademark Information  
Microsoft, Windows and Windows Vista are either registered trademarks or  
trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other  
countries.  
Macintosh and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and  
other countries.  
Adobe and Acrobat are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Inc.  
SDXC, SDHC and SD Logos are trademarks of SD-3C, LLC.  
PictBridge is a trademark.  
HDMI, HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks  
or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.  
Wi-Fi and the Wi-Fi logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of the Wi-Fi  
Alliance.  
All other trade names mentioned in this manual or the other  
documentation provided with your Nikon product are trademarks or  
registered trademarks of their respective holders.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F21  
Index  
Symbols  
uSpecial effects mode.... 46  
R............................................ E6 g(Telephoto) ......................................... 33  
gAE-L/AF-L button.................. 4, 85 hThumbnail display...................... 87  
G
AF area mode.... 58  
,
,
E49 E, Fand NUser settings  
modes.......................................................... 55  
CAperture-priority auto mode  
.............................................................. 49, 51 f(Wide-angle) .................................... 33  
kApply selection button................ 6 .JPG.................................................... E103  
A Auto mode............................ 30, 38 .MOV................................................. E103  
lDelete button......... 37, 98, 100, .NRW................................................. E103  
.WAV ................................................. E103  
mFlash mode ............................. 58, 59  
KFlash pop-up control............... 59  
pFocus mode......................... 58, 64  
w1Function 1 button ......... 4, 74,  
A
AC adapter...................... 102, E104  
Accessory shoe ................... 1, E108  
Accessory Shoe Cover.... 1, E108  
Accessory terminal  
...................... 2, 101, E95, E113  
Active D-Lighting ............ 74, E56  
w2Function 2 button  
.......................... 5, 7, 11, 101, E92  
DManual mode ....................... 49, 51  
dMenu button  
.............................. 12, 73, 88, 96, 99  
xMonitor button............................ 10  
AE/AF lock button.... 85 100, E89  
,
AF area mode........... 58, 73, E49  
AF assist................................. 99, E80  
Aperture value....................................... 49  
Aperture-priority auto mode .... 49 51  
,
h
Movie custom setting mode ... 91  
D Movie mode..................................... 91  
Playback button... 36 97  
iPlayback zoom................................ 86  
Programmed auto mode.... 49 51  
Audio video cable  
............................ 103, E18, E104  
Audio/video-in jack.................... E18  
Auto bracketing...... 70, 72, E38  
Auto flash ................................................. 60  
Auto off..................... 27, 100, E84  
c
,
,
,
A
,
nQuick menu button.......... 70, 95  
yScene mode......................... 39  
Auto with red-eye reduction .... 60 61  
,
n
Self-timer/Smile timer/Remote control  
Autofocus.............. 65, 74, 84, 96,  
Autofocus mode  
................................................ 58  
,
62, 63, 99,  
BShutter-priority auto mode  
.............................................................. 49, 51  
,
............ 65, 74, 96, E53, E71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F22  
   
Customize command dials  
Backlighting o .................................... 43 .................................................. 100, E87  
B
Battery............................ 20, 22, F18 Customize My Menu .... 101, E93  
Battery charger.................... 20, F19  
D
Battery level indicator........................ 26  
Battery-chamber/memory card slot  
cover ................................................. 22, 24  
Best Shot Selector........... 42, E46  
Black and white copy n................. 42  
Black border......................... 89, E14  
Brightness............................. 99, E75  
BSS............................................ 42, E46  
Built-in ND filter...... 74, 97, E55  
Button sound................................. E83  
Date and time.......... 28, 99, E73  
Daylight saving time ..... 28, E74  
Delete .................................. 37, 88, 98,  
Delete button options.... 100 E88  
,
Digital zoom.............. 33, 99, E81  
Diopter adjustment control........... 10  
Direct Print......................... 103, E20  
Distortion control............. 74, E55  
D-Lighting............................. 88, E10  
DPOF printing............................... E24  
C
Calendar display ................................... 87 DSCN................................................ E103  
Choose key picture......... 89, E69  
E
Close range only................................... 65  
Close-up k ............................................. 41  
CLS..................................................... E108  
Color temperature...................... E36  
Command dial....................... 3, 6, 49  
Easy panorama..................... 44, E2  
Editing movies............................... E25  
Editing still images......................... E9  
Exposure compensation................. 69  
Exposure compensation dial........ 69  
Exposure mode .................................... 49  
Extension....................................... E103  
Command dial rotation.... 100  
,
,
Commander mode.... 60 75  
,
Computer................................. 103, 106  
Continuous.......................... 73, E46  
Contrast............................................. E42  
COOLPIX Custom Picture Control  
.......................................... 73, 96, E44  
COOLPIX Picture Control  
External flash unit.... E59  
External mic sensitivity..... 100  
,
,
External microphone.............. E104  
Extracting still images............... E26  
Eye-Fi upload ................... 101, E96  
Eyelet for camera strap ....................... 8  
............................... 70, 72, 95, E40  
Copy......................................... 89, E68  
Crop........................................... 86, E17  
Custom Picture Control  
F
Face detection ...................................... 83  
Face priority ................................... E49  
Fast motion movies.... E31  
File name....................................... E103  
,
.......................................... 73, 96, E44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F23  
Fill flash...................................................... 60 Full-time AF  
Filter effects ...... 88, E12, E42 ....................... 74, 96, E53, E71  
Fireworks show m............................. 42 Functions that cannot be used  
Firmware version............ 101, E98 simultaneously...................................... 77  
Fixed aperture.................... 99, E82  
G
Flash .................................................. 58, 59  
Flash control...................... 101, E97  
Flash control mode.................... E59  
Flash exp. comp................ 74, E54  
Flash mode ................................... 58, 59  
Flash off..................................................... 60  
GPS unit..................... E105, E113  
H
HDMI .................................................. E86  
HDMI device control ................ E86  
HDMI mini connector............... E18  
HDR .............................................................. 43  
High-speed continuous ......... E47  
Histogram.................... 19, 99, E75  
HS movie........................ E31, E32  
Fn1 + command dial....  
Fn1 + selector dial ...  
Fn1 + shutter button ...  
Fn1 guide display ...  
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
I
Fn2 button ......................... 101, E92  
Focal length  
......................... 74, 75, E57, F16  
Focus..... 34, 76, 82, 93, E49,  
Identifier......................................... E103  
Image copy ......................... 89, E68  
Image quality ........... 70, 72, E27  
Image selection screen.................... 90  
Image sharpening...................... E42  
Image size .................. 70, 72, E29  
Infinity......................................................... 65  
Initial monitor display....................... 76  
Internal memory indicator............. 26  
Interval timer shooting ........... E47  
Focus area  
.................... 16, 34, 45, 82, E49  
Focus indicator........................... 15, 34  
Focus lock................................................. 85  
Focus mode................................. 58, 64  
Focus-coupled metering.... 75 E58  
,
ISO sensitivity .... 70  
ISO sensitivity step value... 99  
,
,
,
Food u ...................................................... 42  
Format....................... 24, 100, E85  
Format memory cards  
,
L
Language............................ 100, E85  
Lens......................................... F6, F16  
Lens cap ....................................................... 8  
Lens hood ..................................... E104  
Lens ring.................................. 1, E105  
Li-ion rechargeable battery  
....................................... 24, 100, E85  
Format the internal memory  
.................................................. 100, E85  
Framing grid......................... 16, E75  
FSCN................................................. E103  
Full-frame playback  
............................................ 20, 22, F19  
........................................ 18, 36, 86, 87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F24  
Nikon Creative Lighting System  
M
M exposure preview....... 74, E58 ............................................ E108, F18  
Macro close-up...................................... 65 Noise reduction filter..... 74, E54  
Main command dial........... 3, 6, 49 Number of exposures remaining  
Manual flash........................................... 60 ..................................................... 26, E28  
Manual focus ............................... 65, 66  
O
Manual mode.............................. 49, 51  
Memory capacity............ 26, 91, 92  
Memory card................................ 24, 25  
Memory card slot................................ 24  
Metering................................ 73, E45  
MF distance indicator units  
................................................... 101, E97  
Microphone.......................... 91, E67  
Minimum shutter speed......... E33  
Mode dial.................................................. 30  
Monitor....................... 9, 11, 14, F6  
Monitor settings ............... 99, E75  
Movie and movie custom setting menus  
Optical zoom........................................... 33  
Optional accessories............... E104  
P
Panorama assist................... 44, E5  
Panorama p......................................... 44  
Party/indoor f ..................................... 41  
Pet portrait O....................................... 45  
Photo info................... 75, 99, E75  
PictBridge........................... 103, E20  
Picture Control ... 70 72, 95, E40  
,
Playback ...................... 36, 97, E67  
Playback menu...................................... 88  
Playback mode...................................... 36  
Playback zoom...................................... 86  
Playback/menus........................... E75  
Power............................................... 26, 28  
Power connector...................... E104  
Power supply ................................. E95  
Power switch/power-on lamp........ 2  
Preset manual................................ E37  
Pressing halfway ............... 4, 34, 35  
Print............... E20, E21, E22  
Print date ............................... 99, E77  
Print order............................. 88, E62  
Print order date option............ E63  
Printer ................................... 102, E20  
Programmed auto mode ..... 49, 51  
Protect.................................... 88, E66  
............................................................. 96 E70  
,
Movie custom setting mode ........ 91  
Movie length........................................... 92  
Movie mode............................................ 91  
Movie options.................... 95, E30  
Movie playback ..................................... 97  
Movie recording ................................... 91  
Movie recording time remaining.... 91  
Multi selector........................... 3, 6, 58  
Multi selector right press.... 100 E88  
,
Multi-shot 16.................................. E46  
Museum l............................................. 42  
My Menu .................. 72, 101, E93  
N
Night landscape j ............................ 41  
Night portrait e.................................. 40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F25  
Shooting mode  
Q
Quick adjust.................................... E42 ................................ 31, 75, 96, E70  
Quick menu.............. 70, 95, E27 Shutter sound................................ E83  
Quick retouch...................... 88, E10 Shutter speed ............................. 49, 53  
Shutter-priority auto mode.... 49  
,
R
Shutter-release button.... 34,  
4,  
7,  
RAW (NRW) images.................... E27  
Single ...................................... 73, E46  
Single AF.... 74 96 E53 E71  
RAW (NRW) processing ... 89 E15  
,
,
,
,
Rear-curtain sync................................. 60  
Rechargeable battery........................ 20  
Record orientation ....... 100, E83  
Remote control  
Skin softening........... 84, 88, E11  
Slide show............................ 88, E64  
Slow motion movies.... E31 E32  
,
Slow sync.................................................. 60  
Small picture........................ 88, E13  
Smile timer ................................... 58, 63  
Sound settings................ 100, E83  
Special effects mode......................... 46  
Reset all ................................ 101, E98  
Reset file numbering.... 101, E94  
Reset user settings .............................. 57  
Reverse indicators.......... 101, E97  
Specialized menu for  
E
,
F
or  
N
Rotary multi selector....  
,
,
,
............................................................... 55  
,
Rotate image ...................... 88, E66  
Rotate tall........................... 100, E84  
RSCN................................................. E103  
Speedlight..................................... E108  
Sports d................................................... 40  
SSCN................................................. E103  
S
Startup zoom position.... 74 E57  
,
Saturation......................................... E42  
Save user settings................................ 55  
Scene auto selector x.................... 40  
Scene mode ............................................ 39  
Selecting images................................. 90  
Self-timer............................. 58, 62, 76  
Self-timer lamp........................... 62, 63  
Straighten.............................. 89, E15  
Sub-command dial.............. 3, 6, 49  
Subject tracking ........ E50, E51  
Switching among tabs...................... 13  
T
Target finding AF.............. 82, E51  
Telephoto.................................................. 33  
Thumbnail display .............................. 87  
Time difference............................ E74  
Time zone............................. 28, E74  
Self-timer: after release.... 99 E78  
,
Sequence .............. 37, E7, E68  
Sequence display options  
..................................................... 89, E69  
Setup menu......................... 99, E72  
Shooting.................................................... 30  
Shooting information.............. 11, 14  
Shooting menu................. 73, E44  
Time zone and date.... 28 99, E73  
,
Tone level.................................................. 19  
Tone level information  
............................................ 11, 19, E75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F26  
Toning................................................ E43  
TV ............................................. 102, E18  
TV settings......................... 100, E86  
U
USB cable .............. 103, 106, E20  
USB/audio/video output connector  
.................. 102, 106, E18, E20  
Use GPS to set clock.................. E95  
User settings modes .......................... 55  
V
Vibration reduction......... 99, E79  
Video mode.................................... E86  
View grid........................................... E41  
Viewfinder........................ 10, 32, F6  
ViewNX 2................................................ 104  
Virtual horizon.......... 16, 99, E75  
Virtual horizon display ... 76 E75  
,
Voice memo........................ 88, E67  
Volume ................................... 97, E67  
W
Welcome screen............... 99, E72  
White balance.... 70 72, 95, E35  
,
Wide-angle............................................... 33  
Wind noise reduction.... 97, E72  
Wireless mobile adapter...... E105  
Z
Zoom........................................................... 33  
Zoom control ................................. 6, 33  
Zoom memory .................. 74, E57  
Zoom speed........................ 99, E82  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F27  
No reproduction in any form of this manual, in whole or in  
part (except for brief quotation in critical articles or reviews),  
may be made without written authorization from NIKON  
CORPORATION.  
FX3I04(11)  
6MN29311-04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

MTD Lawn Mower OEM 190 118 User Manual
NETGEAR IP Phone TA612V User Manual
Nikon Film Camera FG User Manual
Nintendo Handheld Game System SPR 001 User Manual
Nokia Stereo System DIGITAL MULTIMEDIA TERMINAL User Manual
Nortec Humidifier 380V User Manual
Nortec Industries Humidifier Electric Steam Humidifiers User Manual
NuTone Patio Heater 9297T User Manual
Onkyo Home Theater System Home Entertainment System User Manual
Panasonic Switch LD Relays ALD User Manual